FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063 802.11 b/g/n+BT BCM943142HM

OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11bgn WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM943142HM FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063; IC: 4324A-BRCM1063 Conditions on using BRCM regulatory approvals:

Customer must ensure that its product (the CUSTOMER Product) is electrically A. identical to Broadcoms reference designs. Customer acknowledges that any modifications to Broadcoms reference designs may invalidate regulatory approvals in relation to the CUSTOMER Product, or may necessitate notifications to the relevant regulatory authorities. Customer is responsible for ensuring that antennas used with the product are of B. the same type, with same or lower gains as approved and providing antenna reports to Broadcom. Customer is responsible for regression testing to accommodate changes to C. Broadcoms reference designs, new antennas, and portable RF exposure safety testing/approvals. The Broadcom radio is approved as a client/slave device; to ensure compliance with Appropriate labels must be affixed to the CUSTOMER Product that comply with D. applicable regulations in all respects. E. local regulations, the device should be set to the country domain in which the access point is installed. F. product that contains the text as required by applicable law. Without limitation of the foregoing, an example (for illustration purposes only) of possible text to include is set forth below:

A users manual or instruction manual must be included with the customer 1. USAFederal Communications Commission (FCC) FCC COMPLIANCE STATEMENT:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. INFORMATION TO USER:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a Page 1 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11bgn WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM943142HM FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063; IC: 4324A-BRCM1063 particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. CAUTION: (this only applicable to 5GHz device) This device is restricted to indoor use due to its operation in the 5.15 to 5.25 GHz frequency range. FCC requires this product to be used indoors for frequency range 5.15 to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite systems. High power radars are allocated as primary users of the 5.25 to 5.35 GHz and 5.65 to 5.85 GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage this device. System integrators must include the FCC ID on the end product. FCC Radio-Frequency Exposure & Approval Conditions:

1. Antennas must be installed at a minimum 0.7cm separation distance from the transmitting antenna to the body of user during normal operating condition. 2. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. 3. Only those antennas with same type and lesser gain filed under this FCC ID number can be used with this device. 4. The regulatory label on the final system must include the statement: Contains FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063 and/or IC: 4324A-BRCM1063 or using electronic labeling method as documented in KDB 784748. 5. The final system integrator must ensure there is no instruction provided in the user manual or customer documentation indicating how to install or remove the transmitter module except such device has implemented two-ways authentication between module and the host system. 6. The final host manual shall include the following regulatory statement:

Page 2 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11bgn WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM943142HM FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063; IC: 4324A-BRCM1063 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

-Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

-Connect the equipment to outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. French:

Cet appareil est conforme avec Industrie Canada exempts de licence standard RSS (s). Lutilisation de ce dispositif est autorise seulement aux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas produire de brouillage et (2) l utilisateur du dispositif doit tre prt accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique reu, mme si ce brouillage est susceptible de compromettre le fonctionnement du dispositif. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. French:

Page 3 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11bgn WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM943142HM FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063; IC: 4324A-BRCM1063 Sous la rglementation d'Industrie Canada, ce transmetteur radio ne peut fonctionner en utilisant une antenne d'un type et un maximum (ou moins) gain approuves pour l'metteur par Industrie Canada. Pour rduire le risque d'interfrence aux autres utilisateurs, le type d'antenne et son gain doivent tre choisis de manire que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (PIRE) ne dpasse pas ce qui est ncessaire pour une communication russie. This radio transmitter, IC ID: 4324A-BRCM1063, has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the onboard antenna or a detachable WLAN antenna with a maximum gain of 3.9dB/2.4GHz and 5.8dBi/5GHz. Any other detachable antennas, with a different type or having a gain greater than 3.9dB/2.4GHz and 5.8dBi/5GHz are strictly prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. French:

Cet metteur radio, IC ID: 4324A-BRCM1063, a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec l'antenne intgre ou une antenne amovible PIFA avec un gain maximum de 3.9dBi/2.4GHz, 5.8dBi/5GHz. Toute autre antenne dtachable, avec un type diffrent ou ayant un gain suprieur 3.9dBi, 5.8dBi est strictement interdit pour une utilisation avec cet appareil. L'impdance d'antenne requise est de 50 ohms. Caution: (this only applicable to UNII device)

(i) the device for operation in the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;

(ii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit; and

(iii) the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate.

(iv) Users should also be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users

(i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. French:

Le guide dutilisation des dispositifs pour rseaux locaux doit inclure des instructions prcises sur les restrictions susmentionnes, notamment :

(i) les dispositifs fonctionnant dans la bande 5 150-5 250 MHz sont rservs uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;

Page 4 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11bgn WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM943142HM FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063; IC: 4324A-BRCM1063

(ii) le gain maximal dantenne permis pour les dispositifs utilisant les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 470-5 725 MHz doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e.;

(iii) le gain maximal dantenne permis (pour les dispositifs utilisant la bande 5 725-5 825 MHz) doit se conformer la limite de p.i.r.e. spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas.

(iv) De plus, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5 250-5 350 MHz et 5 650-5 850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RSS 102 RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 0.7cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Pour se conformer aux exigences de conformit 102 RSS RF exposition, pour des configurations mobiles, une distance de sparation d'au moins 0.7cm doit tre maintenue entre l'antenne de cet appareil et toutes les personnes. Cet appareil ne doit pas tre co-

localiss ou fonctionnant en conjonction avec une autre antenne ou transmetteur. System integrators must include the IC ID on the end product. 3. Europe - EU Restrictions This equipment needs to be marked with the throughout the European community. 2155 symbol and can be used Marking by the symbol indicates that usage restrictions apply. Information to be supplied to the users:

802.11a Restrictions:

- This product is for indoor use only when using channels 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 56, 60, or 64 (5150 5350 MHz).

- DFS and TPC must remain enabled to ensure product compliance with EC regulations. Page 5 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11bgn WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM943142HM FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063; IC: 4324A-BRCM1063

- To ensure compliance with local regulations, be sure to select the country in which the access point is installed.

- This product can be used as shown in the table below:

5 GHz wireless LAN IEEE 802.11a Indoor Use Only A, AND, B, CH, D, CY, CZ, DK, ES, EST, F, FIN, FL, FR, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, IS, L, LT, M, MC, N, NL, P, PL, RSM, S, SK, SLO, V Caution: Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. To comply with RF exposure compliance requirements, for mobile configurations, a separation distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. Czech:

User's Manual in Czech language and a statement of conformity with Directive 1999/5/EC in Czech language must be enclosed to each product. France:

2.4GHz for Metropolitan France:

In all Metropolitan dpartements, wireless LAN frequencies can be used under the following conditions, either for public or private use:

Indoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the entire 2400-2483.5 MHz frequency band Outdoor use: maximum power (EIRP*) of 100 mW for the 2400-2454 MHz band and with maximum power (EIRP*) of 10 mW for the 2454-2483 MHz band Italy:

For private use, a general authorisation is required if WAS/RLANs are used outside own premises. For public use, a general authorisation is required Note for system integrators:

- The module is tested to comply with the requirement of the R&TTE Directive. System integrators are responsible for compliance of the final device with the R&TTE Directive. Page 6 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11bgn WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM943142HM FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063; IC: 4324A-BRCM1063

- Packaging: CE Marking must also be on the outer packaging of the product. The outer packaging must also provide an indication as to where the device is intended to be used and OR conversely, where there may be restrictions for use. 4. Taiwan - NCC Statement to be included in the user guide Statement- For general products Additional Statement - For 5G Band products 5.25G ~5.35G Translation:

Article 12 Without permission, any company, firm or user shall not alter the frequency, increase the power, or change the characteristics and functions of the original design of the certified lower power frequency electric machinery. Article 14 The application of low power frequency electric machineries shall not affect the navigation safety nor interfere a legal communication, if an interference is found, the service will be suspended until improvement is made and the interference no longer exists. The foregoing legal communication refers to the wireless telecommunication operated according to the telecommunications laws and regulations. The low power frequency electric machinery should be able to tolerate the interference of the electric wave radiation electric machineries and equipments for legal communications or industrial and scientific applications. Radio devices using 5.25-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Appendix:

(ID):

Page 7 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11bgn WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM943142HM FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063; IC: 4324A-BRCM1063 CCXXxxLPyyyZz

,, CCXXxxLPyyyZz . 5. Korea Include the following statement either on the label or in the User Guide.

"

"

6. Argentina The current approval is in the name of Broadcoms local representative. It may be necessary to obtain regulatory approval in the name of the local distributor or importer. We suggest manufacturers check with their local distributors and importers in Argentina. 7. Brazil - Anatel Before using Broadcom Anatel approvals, 1. PC- OEM must make arrangement for its local offices or distributors to provide maintenance, technical assistance or replace any faulty products sold in Brazil. 2. All warranty services will be provided by the distributors or PC-OEM sales support in Brazil. An official agreement stating warranty responsibilities must be signed and made available to Broadcom. Interference statement to be included in the Users Guide

"Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio."

Translation:

"This equipment operates in secondary character. It can be affected by harmful interference. However, it cannot cause interference to systems operating in primary character."

Page 8 of 9 OEM Installation Guidance Document For Broadcom 802.11bgn WLAN + Bluetooth Module, BCM943142HM FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063; IC: 4324A-BRCM1063 8. South Africa ICASA PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to supply spare parts and carry out repairs in South Africa. 9. Indonesia - POSTEL PC-OEMs must make arrangement for importers to provide product warranty and after sales services. 10. Japan MIC Radio devices using 5.15-5.35GHz bands are restricted to indoor use only. Page 9 of 9

User Guide Product notice Software terms This guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions of Windows. This computer may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Go to http://www.microsoft.com for details. To obtain the latest information in this guide, contact support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: February 2014 Document Part Number: 753647-001 Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). iii iv Safety warning notice Table of contents 1 Starting right ...................................................................................................................................................... 1 Visit the HP Apps Store ........................................................................................................................ 1 Best practices ....................................................................................................................................... 1 Fun things to do .................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources .............................................................................................................................. 3 2 Getting to know your computer ......................................................................................................................... 5 Finding your hardware and software information ................................................................................. 5 Locating hardware ............................................................................................................... 5 Locating software ................................................................................................................. 5 Right side ............................................................................................................................................. 6 Left side ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Display .................................................................................................................................................. 9 Changing your notebook to an entertainment stand .......................................................... 10 Changing your notebook to a tablet ................................................................................... 10 Top ..................................................................................................................................................... 11 TouchPad .......................................................................................................................... 11 Lights ................................................................................................................................. 12 Speakers ............................................................................................................................ 12 Keys ................................................................................................................................... 13 Labels ................................................................................................................................................. 13 3 Connecting to a network ................................................................................................................................. 15 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................... 15 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 15 Using the wireless button .................................................................................. 15 Using operating system controls ....................................................................... 16 Sharing data and drives and accessing software .............................................................. 16 Using a WLAN ................................................................................................................... 16 Using an Internet service provider .................................................................... 17 Setting up a WLAN ............................................................................................ 17 Configuring a wireless router ............................................................................ 17 Protecting your WLAN ....................................................................................... 17 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................... 18 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................ 18 Inserting and removing a SIM (select models only) .......................................... 19 v Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) ..................................................... 20 Connecting to a wired network ........................................................................................................... 20 Connecting to a local area network (LAN) ......................................................................... 20 4 Enjoying entertainment features ..................................................................................................................... 21 Multimedia features ............................................................................................................................ 21 Using the webcam .............................................................................................................................. 22 Using audio ........................................................................................................................................ 23 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................... 23 Connecting headphones and microphones ....................................................................... 23 Using Beats Audio ............................................................................................................. 23 Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel ............................................................... 23 Enabling and disabling Beats Audio .................................................................. 23 Testing your audio features ............................................................................................... 23 Using video ......................................................................................................................................... 24 Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable ........................................................... 24 Setting up HDMI audio ...................................................................................... 25 Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays ............................. 25 5 Navigating the screen ..................................................................................................................................... 26 Using the TouchPad and gestures ..................................................................................................... 26 Tapping .............................................................................................................................. 27 Scrolling ............................................................................................................................. 28 2-finger pinch zoom ........................................................................................................... 28 2-finger click ....................................................................................................................... 29 Edge swipes ...................................................................................................................... 29 Right-edge swipe .............................................................................................. 29 Left-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 30 Top-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 30 Using touch screen gestures .............................................................................................................. 31 One-finger slide ................................................................................................................. 31 Tapping .............................................................................................................................. 32 Scrolling ............................................................................................................................. 32 2-finger pinch zoom ........................................................................................................... 33 Edge swipes ...................................................................................................................... 34 Right-edge swipe .............................................................................................. 34 Left-edge swipe ................................................................................................. 34 Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe .......................................................... 35 Using the keyboard and mouse .......................................................................................................... 35 Using the keys ................................................................................................................... 35 Using the action keys ........................................................................................ 35 vi Using Windows shortcut keys ........................................................................... 36 Using the hot keys ............................................................................................. 37 6 Managing power ............................................................................................................................................. 38 Initiating Sleep and Hibernation ......................................................................................................... 38 Manually initiating and exiting Sleep .................................................................................. 39 Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) ....................................... 39 Setting password protection on wakeup ............................................................................ 39 Using the power meter and power settings ........................................................................................ 40 Running on battery power .................................................................................................................. 40 Factory-sealed battery ....................................................................................................... 40 Finding battery information ................................................................................................ 40 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 40 Identifying low battery levels .............................................................................................. 41 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................. 41 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ........................ 41 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ..................... 41 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....... 41 Running on external AC power .......................................................................................................... 41 Troubleshooting power problems ...................................................................................... 42 HP CoolSense .................................................................................................................................... 43 Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) .......... 43 Shutting down (turning off) the computer ........................................................................................... 43 7 Maintaining your computer .............................................................................................................................. 45 Improving performance ...................................................................................................................... 45 Using HP 3D DriveGuard ................................................................................................... 45 Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status ................................................................ 45 Using Disk Defragmenter ................................................................................................... 45 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................................... 46 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 46 Cleaning your computer ..................................................................................................................... 46 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................... 47 Cleaning the display (All-in-Ones or Notebooks) .............................................. 47 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................... 47 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse ................................................... 47 Traveling with or shipping your computer ........................................................................................... 47 8 Securing your computer and information ........................................................................................................ 49 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 49 vii Setting Windows passwords .............................................................................................. 50 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................. 50 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................... 50 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................... 51 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................... 51 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................. 51 Installing critical security updates ...................................................................................... 51 Installing HP and third-party software updates .................................................................. 51 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................... 52 Backing up your software applications and information ..................................................................... 52 Using an optional security cable lock ................................................................................................. 52 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ............................................................ 53 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................... 53 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 53 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 53 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 54 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ...................................................................................... 54 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device ............................... 55 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering .......................................................................................................... 56 Creating recovery media and backups ............................................................................................... 56 Creating HP Recovery media ............................................................................................ 56 Restore and recovery ......................................................................................................................... 57 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager .......................................................................... 58 What you need to know ..................................................................................... 58 Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) ...................................... 58 Using HP Recovery media to recover ............................................................... 59 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................... 59 Removing the HP Recovery partition ................................................................................. 59 11 Specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 60 Input power ......................................................................................................................................... 60 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................... 60 12 Electrostatic Discharge ................................................................................................................................. 61 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 62 viii 1 Starting right This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer, fun things to do with your computer, and where to find additional HP resources. Visit the HP Apps Store The HP Apps Store offers a wide choice of popular games, entertainment and music apps, productivity apps, and apps exclusive to HP that you can download to the Start screen. The selection is updated regularly and includes regional content and country-specific offers. Be sure to check the HP Apps Store frequently for new and updated features. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the HP Apps Store. To view and download an app:

1. 2. 3. From the Start screen, select the Store app. Select HP Picks to view all the available apps. Select the app you want to download, and then follow the on-screen instructions. When the download is complete, the app appears on the All apps screen. Best practices To get the most out of your smart investment, after you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps:

If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 15. Take a minute to browse the printed Windows Basics guide to explore the new Windows features. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know your computer on page 5 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 21. Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 51. Back up your hard drive by creating recovery discs or a recovery flash drive. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 56. Fun things to do You know that you can watch a YouTube video on the computer. But did you know that you can also connect your computer to a TV or gaming console? For more information, see Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable on page 24. You know that you can listen to music on the computer. But did you know that you can also stream live radio to the computer and listen to music or talk radio from all over the world? See Using audio on page 23. Visit the HP Apps Store 1 You know that you can create a powerful presentation with Microsoft applications. But did you know you can also connect to a projector to share your ideas with a group? See Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable on page 24. Experience music the way the artist intended, with deep controlled bass and clear, pure sound. See Using Beats Audio on page 23. Use the TouchPad and the new Windows touch gestures for smooth control of images and pages of text. See Using the TouchPad and gestures on page 26. 2 Chapter 1 Starting right More HP resources You have already used Setup Instructions to turn on the computer and locate this guide. To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Contents Overview of computer setup and features Overview of using Windows A broad range of how-to information and troubleshooting tips Online chat with an HP technician Email support Support telephone numbers HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including proper battery disposal information Specific warranty information about this computer Resource Setup Instructions Windows Basics guide Help and Support To access Help and Support, from the Start screen, type help, and then from the Search window, select Help and Support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Worldwide support To get support in your language, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My computer, and then select User guides. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this guide:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Limited Warranty*

To access this guide:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Select My computer, and then select Warranty and services. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments.

*You can find the expressly provided HP Limited Warranty applicable to your product located with the user guides on your computer and/or on the CD/DVD provided in the box. In some countries/regions, HP may provide a printed HP Limited Warranty in the box. For countries/regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you may request a printed copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments or write to:

North America: Hewlett-Packard, MS POD, 11311 Chinden Blvd., Boise, ID 83714, USA More HP resources 3 Resource Contents Europe, Middle East, Africa: Hewlett-Packard, POD, Via G. Di Vittorio, 9, 20063, Cernusco s/Naviglio (MI), Italy Asia Pacific: Hewlett-Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200, Alexandra Post Office, Singapore 911507 When you request a printed copy of your warranty, please include your product number, warranty period (found on your service label), name, and postal address. IMPORTANT: Do NOT return your HP product to the addresses above. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/

contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. 4 Chapter 1 Starting right 2 Getting to know your computer Finding your hardware and software information Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, select System, and then click Device Manager in the left column. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. To find out information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn+esc. Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

From the Start screen, click the down arrow in the lower-left corner of the screen. Finding your hardware and software information 5 Right side Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7) Hard drive light Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive. NOTE: For information about HP 3D DriveGuard, see Using HP 3D DriveGuard on page 45. SIM slot (select models only) Supports a wireless subscriber identity module (SIM). Memory card reader Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the slot, insert the card into the slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card it until it pops out. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. USB 2.0 port USB 3.0 port HDMI port RJ-45 (network) jack/status lights Connects a network cable.

(8) AC adapter light White: The network is connected. Amber: Activity is occurring on the network. On: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charged. Off: The computer is using battery power.

(9) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Left side Component Description

(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer.

(2) Power button NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button will result in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. From the Start screen, type power, select Power and sleep settings, and then select Power and sleep from the list of applications. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-

saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power. Power light

(3)

(4)

(5) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. USB 2.0 port NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Left side 7 Component

(6) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Description Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-in (microphone).

(7) Volume button Controls speaker volume. To decrease speaker volume, press the edge of the button. To increase speaker volume, press the + edge of the button. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Display Component Description

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6) WWAN antennas (2)* (select models only) Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide area networks (WWAN). Webcam light Webcam Internal microphone WLAN antenna*

Internal display switch On: The webcam is in use. Records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To use the webcam, from the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Records sound. Sends and receives wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). Turns off the display and initiates Sleep if the display is closed while the power is on. NOTE: The internal display switch is not visible from the outside of the computer.

*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Your computer can function as a classic notebook, and in addition, the display can be rotated so that the computer transforms into an entertainment stand or a tablet. Display 9 Changing your notebook to an entertainment stand To change your notebook to an entertainment stand, raise the display, and then rotate the display backward to a stand position (about 315 degrees). Changing your notebook to a tablet To change your notebook to a tablet, raise the display, and then rotate the display backward until it is flush with the computer bottom (360 degrees). 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Top TouchPad Component

(1)

(2)

(3) TouchPad zone Moves the on-screen pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. Description Left TouchPad button Right TouchPad button NOTE: The TouchPad also supports edge-swipe gestures. For more information, see Edge swipes on page 29. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Functions like the right button on an external mouse. Top 11 Lights Component Description

(1)

(2) Caps lock light Mute light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the keys to all capital letters. Amber: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. Speakers Component Speakers (2) Description Produce sound. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Keys Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Labels esc key fn key Windows key Description Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the b key, the spacebar, or the esc key. Returns you to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. Important system information is located on the bottom of the computer. The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you will probably be asked for the serial number, and possibly for the product number or the model number. Locate these numbers before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. Labels 13 Component

(1)

(2) Serial number Product number

(3) Warranty period

(4) Model number (select models only) Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. 14 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Wireless technology transfers data across radio waves instead of wires. Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

Wireless local area network (WLAN) deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband Module (select models only)A wireless wide area network (WWAN) device that gives you wireless connectivity over a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth device (select models only)Creates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. For more information about wireless technology, see the information and website links provided in Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using the operating system controls. For more information, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Using the wireless button The computer has a wireless button and one or more wireless devices, depending on the model. All of the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory, so the wireless devices are on when you turn on the computer. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off the wireless devices simultaneously. Connecting to a wireless network 15 Using operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

1. 2. For more information, from the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. Sharing data and drives and accessing software When your computer is part of a network, you are not limited to using only the information that is stored in your computer. Network computers can exchange software and data with each other. NOTE: When a disc like a DVD movie or game is copy-protected, it cannot be shared. To share folders or content on the same network:

1. 2. From the Windows desktop, open File Explorer. From This PC, click a folder with content you want to share. Select Share from the navigation bar at the top of the window, and then click Specific people. Type a name in the File Sharing box, and then click Add. 3. 4. Click Share and then follow the on-screen instructions. To share drives on the same network:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Select Open Network and Sharing Center. 2. 3. Under View your active networks, select an active network. 4. Select Change advanced sharing settings to set sharing options for privacy, network discovery, file and printer sharing or other network options. Using a WLAN With a WLAN device, you can access a wireless local area network (WLAN), which is composed of other computers and accessories that are linked by a wireless router or a wireless access point. NOTE: The terms wireless router and wireless access point are often used interchangeably. A large-scale WLAN, such as a corporate or public WLAN, typically uses wireless access points that can accommodate a large number of computers and accessories and can separate critical network functions. A home or small office WLAN typically uses a wireless router, which allows several wireless and wired computers to share an Internet connection, a printer, and files without requiring additional pieces of hardware or software. To use the WLAN device in your computer, you must connect to a WLAN infrastructure (provided through a service provider or a public or corporate network). 16 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network Using an Internet service provider When you are setting up Internet access in your home, you must establish an account with an Internet service provider (ISP). To purchase Internet service and a modem, contact a local ISP. The ISP will help set up the modem, install a network cable to connect your wireless router to the modem, and test the Internet service. NOTE: Your ISP will give you a user ID and a password to use for Internet access. Record this information and store it in a safe place. Setting up a WLAN To set up a WLAN and connect to the Internet, you need the following equipment:

A broadband modem (either DSL or cable) (1) and high-speed Internet service purchased from an Internet service provider A wireless router (2) (purchased separately) A wireless computer (3) NOTE: Some modems have a built-in wireless router. Check with your ISP to determine what type of modem you have. The illustration below shows an example of a wireless network installation that is connected to the Internet. As your network grows, additional wireless and wired computers can be connected to the network to access the Internet. For help in setting up your WLAN, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. Configuring a wireless router For help in configuring a wireless router, see the information provided by your router manufacturer or your ISP. NOTE:

It is recommended that you initially connect your new wireless computer to the router by using the network cable provided with the router. When the computer successfully connects to the Internet, disconnect the cable, and access the Internet through your wireless network. Protecting your WLAN When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. If you are concerned about the security of your computer when connected to a hotspot, limit your network activities to email that is not confidential and basic Internet surfing. Wireless radio signals travel outside the network, so other WLAN devices can pick up unprotected signals. Take the following precautions to protect your WLAN:

Connecting to a wireless network 17 Use a firewall. A firewall checks information and requests that are sent to your network, and discards any suspicious items. Firewalls are available in both software and hardware. Some networks use a combination of both types. Use wireless encryption. Wireless encryption uses security settings to encrypt and decrypt data that is transmitted over the network. For more information, from the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to the WLAN, follow these steps:

1. 2. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. If the device is off, the airplane mode icon displays on the Windows desktop; press the wireless button to turn the WLAN device on. From the Start screen, point to the far-right upper or lower corner of the screen to display the charms. Select Settings, and then click the network status icon. Select your WLAN from the list. 3. 4. 5. Click Connect. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Type the code, and then click Sign in to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, from the Windows desktop, right-

click the network status icon, and then select Open Network and Sharing Center. Click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. 6. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use WWANs to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a cellular phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to cellular phone voice coverage. When used with mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send email, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. HP supports the following technologies:

18 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network HSPA (High Speed Packet Access), which provides access to networks based on the Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) telecommunications standard. EV-DO (Evolution Data Optimized), which provides access to networks based on the code division multiple access (CDMA) telecommunications standard. LTE (Long Term Evolution), which provides access to networks supporting LTE technology. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service. The serial number is printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be provided in the HP Mobile Broadband information provided with your computer or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about inserting and removing the SIM, see the Inserting and removing a SIM (select models only) on page 19 section in this chapter. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband information included with your computer. Inserting and removing a SIM (select models only) CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connectors, use minimal force when inserting a SIM. Shut down the computer. To insert a SIM, follow these steps:

1. 2. Close the display. 3. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 4. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. 5. Insert the SIM into the SIM slot, and then gently push the SIM into the slot until it is firmly seated. NOTE: The SIM in your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. 6. Reconnect external power. Connecting to a wireless network 19 7. Reconnect external devices. 8. To remove a SIM, press in on the SIM, and then remove it from the slot. Turn on the computer. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook, PDA) Phones (cellular, cordless, smart phone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a PAN of Bluetooth devices. For information about configuring and using Bluetooth devices, see the Bluetooth software Help. Connecting to a wired network Connecting to a local area network (LAN) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 (network) cable. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. 2. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. NOTE:

interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents 20 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the webcam, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, or TV, or speakers and headphones. Multimedia features Here are some of the entertainment features on your computer. Component

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4) Webcam light Webcam Description On: The webcam is in use. Records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. From the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. Internal microphone Records sound. HDMI port Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed HDMI device. Multimedia features 21 Component Description

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10) USB 3.0 port USB 2.0 ports Memory card reader SIM slot (select models only) Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connect an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. To insert a card:

Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the slot, insert the card into the slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card it until it pops out. Supports a wireless subscriber identity module

(SIM). Speakers (2) Produce sound. Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-

conductor connector that supports both audio-out

(headphone) and audio-in (microphone). Using the webcam The computer has an integrated webcam that records video and captures photographs. Some models may allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To start the webcam, from the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. For details about using the webcam, go to Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. 22 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Using audio On your computer, you can download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web

(including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-

out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 25. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones and microphones You can connect wired headphones or headsets to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) jack on your computer. Many headsets with integrated microphones are commercially available. To connect wireless headphones or headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this guide, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Using Beats Audio Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. You can experience Beats Audio through the computer's internal speakers, through external speakers connected to a USB port, or through Beats Audio headphones connected to the headphone jack. Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel Use Beats Audio Control Panel to view and manually control audio and bass settings. From Start screen, type c, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. Enabling and disabling Beats Audio To enable or disable Beats Audio, press the fn key in combination with the b key. Testing your audio features To check the audio functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. When the Sound window opens, select the Sounds tab. Under Program Events, select any From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. sound event, such as a beep or alarm, and then click Test. You should hear sound through the speakers or through connected headphones. Using audio 23 Save the file to your desktop. From the Start screen, type sound, and then select Sound Recorder. To check the recording functions on your computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click Start Recording and speak into the microphone. 3. 4. Open a multimedia program and play the recording. To confirm or change the audio settings on your computer, follow these steps:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Sound. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. Your computer has a high-definition multimedia interface (HDMI) port, which allows you to connect a high-definition monitor or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Check the device manufacturer's instructions. Connecting video devices by using an HDMI cable NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, sold separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions. 1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. 3. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

24 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across both the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE: For best results, especially if you choose the Extend option, adjust the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution. Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. Discovering and connecting to Miracast-compatible wireless displays To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays without leaving your current apps, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Swipe from the right edge of the Start screen, tap Devices, tap Project, and then follow the on-

screen instructions. or Point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the Start screen to display the charms, click Devices, click Project, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using video 25 5 Navigating the screen You can navigate the computer screen in the following ways:

Touch gestures Keyboard and mouse Touch gestures can be used on your computer TouchPad or on a touch screen. NOTE: An external USB mouse (purchased separately) can be connected to one of the USB ports on the computer. Review the Windows Basics guide included with your computer. The guide provides information about common tasks using the TouchPad, touch screen, or the keyboard. Your computer model has special action keys or hot key functions on the keyboard to perform routine tasks. Using the TouchPad and gestures The TouchPad allows you to navigate the computer screen and control the pointer by using simple finger movements. You can customize the touch gestures by changing settings, button configurations, click speed, and pointer options. You can also view demonstrations of TouchPad gestures. From the Start screen, type control panel, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. TIP: Use the left and right buttons on the TouchPad as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. NOTE: TouchPad gestures are not supported in all apps. 26 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Tapping To make an on-screen selection, use the tap function on the TouchPad. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone to make a selection. Double-tap an item to open it. Using the TouchPad and gestures 27 Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. 2-finger pinch zoom 2-finger pinch zoom allows you to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers apart. 28 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen 2-finger click 2-finger click allows you to make menu selections for an object on the screen. NOTE: Using 2-finger click is the same action as using right-click with the mouse. Place two fingers on the TouchPad zone and press down to open the options menu for the selected object. Edge swipes Edge swipes allow you to perform tasks such as changing settings and finding or using apps. Right-edge swipe The right-edge swipe reveals the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Swipe your finger gently from the right edge to reveal the charms. Using the TouchPad and gestures 29 Left-edge swipe The left-edge swipe accesses your recently opened apps so that you can switch between them quickly. Swipe your finger gently from the left edge of the TouchPad. Top-edge swipe The top-edge swipe displays app command options that allow you to customize apps. IMPORTANT: When an app is active, the top-edge gesture varies depending on the app. Gently swipe your gently from the top edge to reveal the app command options. 30 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Using touch screen gestures A touch screen computer allows you to control items on the screen directly with your fingers. TIP: On touch screen computers, you can perform the gestures on the screen or on the TouchPad. You can also perform on-screen actions with the keyboard and mouse. One-finger slide The one-finger slide is mostly used to pan or scroll through lists and pages, but you can use it for other interactions, too, such as moving an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. NOTE: When many apps are displayed on the Start screen, you can slide your finger to move the screen left or right. To drag, press and hold an object, and then drag the object to move it. Using touch screen gestures 31 Tapping To make an on-screen selection, use the tap function. Use one finger to tap an object on the screen to make a selection. Double-tap an item to open it. Scrolling Scrolling is useful for moving the pointer up, down, left, or right on a page or image. Place two fingers on the screen and then drag them in an up, down, left, or right motion. 32 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen 2-finger pinch zoom 2-finger pinch zoom allows you to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the screen and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the screen and then moving your fingers apart. Using touch screen gestures 33 Edge swipes With edge swipes you can perform tasks such as changing settings and finding or using apps. Right-edge swipe The right-edge swipe reveals the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Gently swipe your finger inward from the right edge of the display onto the screen to reveal the charms. Left-edge swipe The left-edge swipe reveals your open apps so that you can switch to them quickly. Gently swipe your finger inward from the left edge of the display to switch between apps. Without lifting your finger, swipe back toward the left edge to reveal all open apps. 34 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe The top-edge swipe or bottom-edge swipe displays app command options that allow you to customize apps. IMPORTANT: When an app is open, the top-edge gesture varies depending on the app. Gently swipe your finger from the top edge or the bottom edge to reveal the app command options. Using the keyboard and mouse The keyboard and mouse allow you to type, select items, scroll and to perform the same functions as you do using touch gestures. The keyboard also allows you to use action keys and hot keys to perform specific functions. on the keyboard allows you to quickly return to the Start screen from TIP: The Windows key an open app or the Windows desktop. Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. NOTE: Depending on the country or region, your keyboard may have different keys and keyboard functions than those discussed in this section. Using the keys You can quickly access information or perform functions by using certain keys and key combinations. Using the action keys An action key performs an assigned function. The icon on each of the f1 through f4 keys and the f6 through f12 keys illustrates the assigned function for that key. To use an action key function, press and hold the key. CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Using the keyboard and mouse 35 The action key feature is enabled at the factory. You can disable this feature in Setup Utility (BIOS). See Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) on page 53 for instructions on opening Setup Utility (BIOS), and then follow the instructions at the bottom of the screen. After you have disabled the action key feature, you can still perform each function by pressing the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. Icon Key f1 f2 f3 f4 f6 f7 f8 f9 f10 f11 f12 Description Opens Help and Support, which provides tutorials, information about the Windows operating system and your computer, answers to questions, and updates to your computer. Help and Support also provides automated troubleshooting tools and access to support. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Decreases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a BD. Begins, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Using Windows shortcut keys Windows provides shortcuts so that you can perform actions quickly. Press the Windows key alone or in combination with a specific key to perform a designated action. For commonly used shortcuts, use the Windows Basics guide. 36 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Using the hot keys A hot key is a combination of the fn key and the esc key, the b key, or the spacebar. To use a hot key:

Briefly press the fn key, and then briefly press the second key of the combination. Using the keyboard and mouse 37 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power only and an AC power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Your computer supports an optimal power plan to manage how your computer uses and conserves power so that computer performance is balanced with power conservation. Initiating Sleep and Hibernation Microsoft Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity when running on battery power or on external power. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 39. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. NOTE: You can manually initiate Hibernation. See Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 39 and Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) on page 39. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate Sleep while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation. 38 Chapter 6 Managing power Manually initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Close the display. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Sleep. To exit Sleep:

Briefly press the power button. If the display is closed, open the display. Press a key on the keyboard. Tap or swipe the TouchPad. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows password before the computer will return to the screen. Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) From the Start screen, type power options, then select Power options. In the left pane, click Choose what the power button does. You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. 2. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. 5. Click Save changes. When the computer exits Hibernation, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

password before your work will return to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on wakeup, you must enter your Windows In the When I press the power button area, select Hibernate. Setting password protection on wakeup To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

From the Start screen, type power options, then select Power options. 1. 2. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). NOTE:

If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Click Save changes. Initiating Sleep and Hibernation 39 Using the power meter and power settings The power meter is located on the Windows desktop. The power meter allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To reveal the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, on the Windows desktop, point over the power meter icon. To use Power Options, click the power meter icon and select an item from the list. From the Start screen, you can also type power options, and then select Power Options. Different power meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. The icon also reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. If the computer has a charged battery installed and the AC adapter is disconnected from the computer, the computer automatically switches to battery power and the screen brightness decreases to conserve battery life. The battery in the computer slowly discharges when the computer is off and unplugged from external power. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Factory-sealed battery To monitor the status of your battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in Help and Support. To access battery information, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, and then select Battery and performance. If Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. Do not attempt to remove or replace the factory-sealed battery. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If the battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. Finding battery information To monitor the status of your battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in HP Support Assistant. To access battery information, from the Start screen, type support, select the HP Support Assistant app, and then select Battery and performance. HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Battery test Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power Tips for conserving battery power and maximizing battery life:

Lower the brightness on the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. 40 Chapter 6 Managing power Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Identifying low battery levels When a battery that is the sole power source for the computer reaches a low or critical battery level, the power meter icon on the Windows desktop shows a low or critical battery notification. NOTE: For additional information about the power meter, see Using the power meter and power settings on page 40. The computer takes the following actions for a critical battery level:

If Hibernation is disabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer remains briefly in the Sleep state, and then shuts down and loses any unsaved information. If Hibernation is enabled and the computer is on or in the Sleep state, the computer initiates Hibernation. Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect an AC adapter. Connect an optional docking or expansion device. Connect an optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP. Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation When the computer lacks sufficient power to exit Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. Connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. 2. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. Running on external AC power For information about connecting to AC power, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to AC external power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking/expansion device. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Connect the computer to external AC power under any of the following conditions:

Running on external AC power 41 WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are onboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or modifying system software When writing information to a disc (select models only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to external AC power:

The battery begins to charge. The screen brightness increases. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. When you disconnect external AC power, the following events occur:

The computer switches to battery power. The screen brightness automatically decreases to save battery life. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. Troubleshooting power problems Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

The computer does not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power lights are off. To test the AC adapter:

1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 3. Shut down the computer. Turn on the computer. If the power lights turn on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the power lights remain off, check the connection from the AC adapter to the computer and the connection from the AC adapter to the AC outlet to be sure that the connections are secure. If the connections are secure and the power lights remain off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact support for information about obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. 42 Chapter 6 Managing power HP CoolSense automatically detects when the computer is not on a horizontal surface and HP CoolSense adjusts performance and fan settings to keep the surface temperature of your computer at the optimum level of comfort. When HP CoolSense is off, the position of the computer is not detected and the performance and fan options remain at the factory setting. As a result, the surface temperature of the computer might be higher than it would be with HP CoolSense on. To turn CoolSense off or on, follow these steps:

From the Start screen, type coolsense, and then select HP CoolSense. Refreshing your software content with Intel Smart Connect Technology (select models only) When the computer is in the Sleep state, Intel Smart Connect Technology periodically causes the computer to exit Sleep. If a network connection is available, Smart Connect updates open apps such as your email inboxes, social network sites, and news pages and then returns the computer to the Sleep state. Smart Connect also syncs content that you have created offline, such as emails. When the computer exits Sleep, you have immediate access to your updated information. To enable this feature or manually adjust the settings, from the Start screen, type smart, and then select Intel Smart Connect Technology. Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB or video port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, you must first exit Sleep or Although you can turn off the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command:

NOTE:

Hibernation before shutdown is possible by briefly pressing the power button. 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. From the Start screen, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. 3. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Shut down. or HP CoolSense 43 Right-click the Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen, select Shut down, and then select Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

Press ctrl+alt+delete, click the Power icon, and then select Shut Down. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power. 44 Chapter 6 Managing power 7 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter provides information about improving the performance of your computer by running tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides information about updating your programs and drivers, instructions for cleaning your computer, and tips for traveling with your computer. Improving performance Everyone wants a fast computer and you can drastically improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using HP 3D DriveGuard HP 3D DriveGuard protects a hard drive by parking the drive and halting data requests under either of the following conditions:

You drop the computer. You move the computer with the display closed while the computer is running on battery power. A short time after the end of one of these events, HP 3D DriveGuard returns the hard drive to normal operation. NOTE: Because solid state drives (SSDs) lack moving parts, they do not require HP 3D DriveGuard protection. NOTE: A hard drive in a primary hard drive bay or a secondary hard drive bay is protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. A hard drive installed in an optional docking device or connected to a USB port is not protected by HP 3D DriveGuard. For more information, see the HP 3D DriveGuard software Help. Identifying HP 3D DriveGuard status The hard drive light on the computer changes color to show that the drive is parked. To determine whether the drive is currently protected or whether it is parked, view the icon on the Windows desktop in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, or in the Mobility Center. Using Disk Defragmenter As you use your computer over time, the files on the hard drive become fragmented. A fragmented drive means data on your drive is not contiguous (sequential) and, because of this, the hard drive works harder to locate files, thus slowing down the computer. Disk Defragmenter consolidates (or physically reorganizes) the fragmented files and folders on the hard drive so that the system can run more efficiently. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. After you start Disk Defragmenter, it works without supervision. However, depending on the size of your hard drive and the number of fragmented files, Disk Defragmenter may take more than an hour to complete. Improving performance 45 HP recommends defragmenting your hard drive at least once a month. You may set Disk Defragmenter to run on a monthly schedule, but you can defragment your computer manually at any time. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. Connect the computer to AC power. From the Start screen, type disk. 2. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. Using Disk Cleanup Disk Cleanup searches the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type disk, and then select Uninstall apps to free up disk space. Follow the on-screen instructions. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis to the latest versions. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. Technology is always changing, and updating programs and drivers allows your computer to run the latest technology available. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. Cleaning your computer Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride 0.3 percent maximum concentration (for example, disposable wipes, which come in a variety of brands). Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Water with mild soap solution Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Static-free cloth wipes CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. 46 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is turned on. Turn off the computer. Disconnect AC power. Disconnect all powered external devices. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display (All-in-Ones or Notebooks) Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that the display is dry before closing the display. Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, here are some tips to keep in mind to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards, from the computer. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. Traveling with or shipping your computer 47 When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. If the computer has a wireless device installed, the use of these devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a particular device, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. 48 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer 8 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the non-Windows Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. IMPORTANT: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Computer risk Unauthorized use of the computer Computer viruses Unauthorized access to data Security feature Power-on password Antivirus software Firewall software Unauthorized access to Setup Utility (BIOS) settings and other system identification information Administrator password Ongoing or future threats to the computer Unauthorized access to a Windows user account Unauthorized removal of the computer Software updates User password Security cable lock Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in the HP Setup Utility (BIOS) that is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. Use the following tips for creating and saving passwords:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every three months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords, from the Start screen, type hp support assistant, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Using passwords 49 Setting Windows passwords Password User password Administrator password Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility (BIOS) contents. Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility

(BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: Your administrator password is not interchangeable with an administrator password set in Windows, nor is it revealed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. NOTE:

password check, you must enter the administrator password to access Setup Utility (BIOS). If you enter the power-on password at the first Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. NOTE: The administrator password can be used in place of the power-on password. NOTE: A power-on password is not revealed as it is set, entered, changed, or deleted. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

1. To start Setup Utility (BIOS), turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade 50 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use the antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, from the Start screen, type hp support assistant, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. Installing software updates HP, Microsoft Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. For more information, see Updating programs and drivers on page 46. Installing critical security updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can choose whether updates are installed automatically. To change the settings, from the Start screen, type c, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, select Windows Update, select Change settings, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Installing HP and third-party software updates HP recommends that you regularly update the software and drivers that were originally installed on your computer. To download the latest versions, go to http://www.hp.com/support. At this location, you can also register to receive automatic update notifications when they become available. Installing software updates 51 If you have installed third-party software after you purchased your computer, regularly update the software. Software companies provide software updates to their products to correct security problems and improve functionality of the software. Securing your wireless network When you set up your wireless network, always enable security features. For more information, see Protecting your WLAN on page 17. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. For more information, see Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 56. Using an optional security cable lock A security cable lock, which is purchased separately, is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Security cable locks are only one of several methods that should be employed as part of a complete security solution to help maximize theft protection. The security cable slot on your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. For the location of the security cable slot on your computer, see Getting to know your computer on page 5. 1. 2. 3. Loop the security cable lock around a secured object. Insert the key (1) into the security cable lock (2). Insert the security cable lock into the security cable slot on the computer (3), and then lock the security cable lock with the key. 4. Remove the key and keep it in a safe place. 52 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) To start Setup Utility (BIOS), turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than those currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS currently installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be revealed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Setup Utility (BIOS). 1. 2. Use the arrow keys to select Main, and then make note of your current BIOS version. 3. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 53). To exit Setup Utility (BIOS) without saving your changes, use the arrow keys to select Exit, select Exit Discarding Changes, and then press enter. Select Yes. 4. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) 53 Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. From the Start screen, type hp support assistant, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. 2. Click Updates and tune-ups, and then click Check for HP updates now. 3. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. b. NOTE:

installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before From the Start screen, type file, and then select File Explorer. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are revealed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are revealed, follow these steps:

1. 2. Click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. 54 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) and HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics UEFI:

1. Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 55. b. Hard drive c. BIOS 2. When the diagnostic tool opens, use the keyboard arrow keys to select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device Instructions for downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) are provided in English NOTE:

only. 1. Go to http://www.hp.com. 2. 3. Point to Support, located at the top of the page, and then click the Download Drivers. In the text box, enter the product name, and then click Go. or Click Find Now to let HP automatically detect your product. Select your computer model, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostic section, click HP UEFI Support Environment. or Click Download, and then select Run. 4. 5. Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) 55 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes:

Creating recovery media and backups Restoring and recovering your system Creating recovery media and backups 1. After you successfully set up the computer, create HP Recovery media. This step creates a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. The backup can be used to reinstall the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. HP Recovery media you create will provide the following recovery options:

System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system and the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image RecoveryReinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. See Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. 2. Use the Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information. For more information and steps, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. Creating HP Recovery media HP Recovery Manager is a software program that offers a way to create recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. HP Recovery media can be used to perform system recovery if the hard drive becomes corrupted. System recovery reinstalls the original operating system and the software programs installed at the factory, and then configures the settings for the programs. HP Recovery media can also be used to customize the system or restore the factory image if you replace the hard drive. Only one set of HP Recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for the blank USB flash drive or the number of blank DVD discs that will be required. To create recovery discs, your computer must have an optical drive with DVD writer capability, and you must use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE

(rewritable Blu-ray) discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. Or instead you can use a high-quality blank USB flash drive. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, but you would like to create DVD recovery media, you can use an external optical drive (purchased 56 Chapter 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering separately) to create recovery discs, or you can obtain recovery discs for your computer from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected directly to a USB port on the computer; the drive cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take up to an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery DVDs. HP Recovery Manager will finish burning the current DVD. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue, and the remaining discs will be burned. To create HP Recovery media:

1. 2. If you ever need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Recovery Media Creation, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery There are several options for recovering your system. Choose the method that best matches your situation and level of expertise:

Windows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state. For more information and steps, see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. If you need to correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver, use the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option of HP Recovery Manager to reinstall the individual application or driver. From the Start screen, type recovery, select HP Recovery Manager, select Drivers and Applications Reinstall, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you want to reset your computer using a minimized image, you can choose the HP Minimized Image Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select models only) or HP Recovery media. Minimized Image Recovery installs only drivers and hardware-enabling applications. Other applications included in the image continue to be available for installation through the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option in HP Recovery Manager. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. If you want to recover the computer's original factory partitioning and content, you can choose the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select models only) or use the HP Recovery media that you have created. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. If you have replaced the hard drive, you can use the Factory Reset option of HP Recovery media to restore the factory image to the replacement drive. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 58. If you wish to remove the recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space, HP Recovery Manager offers the Remove Recovery Partition option. Restore and recovery 57 For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition on page 59. Recovering using HP Recovery Manager HP Recovery Manager software allows you to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you created or by using the HP Recovery partition (select models only). If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. Using HP Recovery media, you can choose from one of the following recovery options:

System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image Recovery (select models only)Reinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. The HP Recovery partition (select models only) allows System Recovery and Minimized Image Recovery. What you need to know HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. HP Recovery media must be used if the computer hard drive fails. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. To use the Factory Reset option, you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. If the HP Recovery media does not work, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data you wish to retain. Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) The HP Recovery partition (select models only) allows you to perform a system recovery or minimized image recovery without the need for recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can only be used if the hard drive is still working. To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:

1. Press f11 while the computer boots. or 58 Chapter 10 Backing up, restoring, and recovering Press and hold f11 as you press the power button. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. Using HP Recovery media to recover You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original system. This method can be used if your system does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly. 1. 2. If possible, back up all personal files. Insert the HP Recovery media that you created, and then restart the computer. NOTE:

computer boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 59. Follow the on-screen instructions. If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the 3. Changing the computer boot order If computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order, which is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection for an optical drive or a USB flash drive. To change the boot order:

1. 2. Restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. 3. 4. Insert the HP Recovery media you created. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive you want to boot from. Follow the on-screen instructions. Removing the HP Recovery partition HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you can no longer use the Windows Refresh option or the Windows option to remove everything and reinstall Windows. In addition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery or Minimized Image Recovery from the HP Recovery partition. So before you remove the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media; see Creating HP Recovery media on page 56. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery 59 11 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 19.5 V dc @ 2.31 A 45 W 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A 65W DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft 60 Chapter 11 Specifications 12 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded, and then remove the cover. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface of the component. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 61 Index Symbols/Numerics 2-finger pinch zoom TouchPad gesture 28 2-finger pinch zoom touchPad gesture 33 A AC adapter 6 AC adapter, testing 42 action keys decrease screen brightness 36 Help and Support 36 identifying 13 increase screen brightness 36 play, pause, resume 36 previous track or section 36 switch screen image 36 volume down 36 volume mute 36 volume up 36 wireless 36 antivirus software, using 51 audio features, testing 23 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) jack 8, 22 B backing up software and information 52 backups 56 battery discharging 40 low battery levels 41 battery information, finding 40 battery power 40 Beats Audio 23 Beats Audio Control Panel 23 Beats Audio hot key 23 BIOS determining version 53 downloading an update 54 updating 53 Bluetooth device 15, 20 Bluetooth label 14 62 Index boot order, changing 59 bottom 14 buttons left TouchPad 11 power 7 right TouchPad 11 C caps lock light, identifying 12 caring for your computer 46 cleaning your computer 46 components display 9 left side 7 right side 6 top 11 connecting to a WLAN 18 connector, power 6 corporate WLAN connection 18 critical battery level 41 critical security updates, installing 51 D deleted files restoring 57 Disk Cleanup software 46 Disk Defragmenter software 45 E edge-swipe gestures 29, 34 bottom-edge swipe 35 top-edge swipe 35 electrostatic discharge 61 esc key, identifying 13 external AC power, using 41 F firewall software 51 fn key, identifying 13, 37 fun things to do 1 H hard drive HP 3D DriveGuard 45 hard drive light 6 HDMI configuring audio 25 HDMI port connecting 24 identifying 6, 21 headphones and microphones, connecting 23 Hibernation exiting 39 initiated during critical battery level 41 initiating 39 high-definition devices, connecting 24, 25 hot keys description 37 using 37 HP 3D DriveGuard 45 HP and third-party software updates, installing 51 HP Mobile Broadband, disabled 19 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

(UEFI) downloading 55 using 54 HP Recovery Manager correcting boot problems 59 starting 58 HP Recovery media creating 56 recovery 59 HP Recovery partition recovery 58 removing 59 I input power 60 installing critical security updates 51 optional security cable lock 52 internal display switch, identifying 9 internal microphone, identifying 9, 21 Internet connection setup 17 Internet security software, using 50 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) 8, 22 network 6 RJ-45 (network) 6 K keyboard hot keys, identifying 37 keys action 13 esc 13 fn 13 Windows 13 L labels Bluetooth 14 regulatory 14 serial number 13 service 13 wireless certification 14 WLAN 14 LAN, connecting 20 left-edge swipe 30, 34 lights AC adapter 6 caps lock 12 hard drive 6 mute 12 power 7 RJ-45 (network) status 6 low battery level 41 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 46 Disk Defragmenter 45 memory card inserting 6 removing 6 memory card reader, identifying 6, 22 minimized image recovery 58 minimized image, creating 58 Miracast 25 mouse, external setting preferences 26 mute light, identifying 12 N network jack, identifying 6 O operating environment 60 original system recovery 58 P passwords Setup Utility (BIOS) 50 Windows 50 ports HDMI 6, 21, 24 Miracast 25 USB 2.0 6, 7, 22 USB 3.0 6, 22 power battery 40 power button, identifying 7 power connector, identifying 6 power lights, identifying 7 product name and number, computer 13 public WLAN connection 18 R recovery discs 56, 59 HP Recovery Manager 58 media 59 options 57 starting 58 supported discs 56 system 58 USB flash drive 59 using HP Recovery media 57 recovery media creating 56 creating using HP Recovery Manager 57 recovery partition removing 59 regulatory information regulatory label 14 wireless certification labels 14 restore Windows File History 57 right-edge swipe 29, 34 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 6 RJ-45 (network) status lights, identifying 6 S scrolling TouchPad gesture 28 security cable lock, installing 52 security cable slot, identifying 7 security, wireless 17 serial number 13 serial number, computer 13 service labels, locating 13 setting password protection on wakeup 39 setup of WLAN 17 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 50 shipping the computer 47 shutdown 43 SIM inserting 19 removing 19 SIM slot, identifying 6, 22 Sleep exiting 39 initiating 39 slots memory card reader 6, 22 security cable 7 SIM 6, 22 software Disk Cleanup 46 Disk Defragmenter 45 software updates, installing 51 speakers connecting 23 identifying 12, 22 supported discs, recovery 56 system recovery 58 system restore point creating 56 T tapping TouchPad gesture 27 testing an AC adapter 42 testing audio features 23 Index 63 operating system 15 Wireless Assistant software 15 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 18 corporate WLAN connection 18 equipment needed 17 functional range 18 public WLAN connection 18 security 17 using 16 wireless network, securing 52 WLAN antenna, identifying 9 WLAN device 14, 16 WLAN label 14 WWAN antennas, identifying 9 WWAN device 18 top-edge swipe 30 touch screen gestures 34 2-finger pinch zoom 33 bottom-edge swipe 35 edge-swipe gestures 34, 35 one-finger slide 31 scrolling 32 tapping 32 top-edge swipe 35 touch screen, using 31 TouchPad buttons 11 TouchPad gestures 2-finger pinch zoom 28 scrolling 28 tapping 27 TouchPad zone, identifying 11 traveling with the computer 14, 47 turning off the computer 43 U unresponsive system 43 USB 2.0 ports, identifying 6, 7, 22 USB 3.0 ports, identifying 6, 22 using external AC power 41 using passwords 49 V vents, identifying 7 video 24 volume button 8 W webcam identifying 9, 21 using 22 webcam light, identifying 9, 21 Windows File History 57 restoring files 57 system restore point 56 Windows key, identifying 13 Windows passwords 50 Wireless Assistant software 15 wireless button 15 wireless certification label 14 wireless controls button 15 64 Index

Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices User Guide Copyright 20082011 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. ENERGY STAR is a registered mark owned by the U.S. government. Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Third Edition: August 2011 First Edition: February 2011 Document Part Number: 653267-003 Table of contents 1 Regulatory notices .......................................................................................................................................... 1 Federal Communications Commission notice ...................................................................................... 2 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 2 Cables .................................................................................................................................. 2 Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo (United States only) ..... 3 Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules ............................. 3 Brazil notice .......................................................................................................................................... 4 Canada notices .................................................................................................................................... 4 Avis Canadien ...................................................................................................................................... 4 European Union Regulatory notices ..................................................................................................... 4 Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules .................................................................... 5 Ergonomics notice ............................................................................................................... 6 Germany ............................................................................................................. 6 Japan notices ....................................................................................................................................... 7 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN 802.11g devices ............................................................................................ 7 Bluetooth devices ................................................................................................................ 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings ................................... 8 South Korea notice ............................................................................................................................... 8 Mexico notice ....................................................................................................................................... 8 Singapore wireless notice .................................................................................................................... 8 Thailand WWAN wireless notice .......................................................................................................... 9 Taiwan notices ..................................................................................................................................... 9 Wireless LAN 802.11a devices ............................................................................................ 9 Wireless LAN 802.11b devices ............................................................................................ 9 Airline travel notice ............................................................................................................................... 9 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 10 ENERGY STAR compliance .............................................................................................................. 10 Laser compliance ............................................................................................................................... 11 Modem notices ................................................................................................................................... 11 Telecommunications device approvals .............................................................................. 11 U.S. modem statements .................................................................................................... 12 iii U.S. modem declarations .................................................................................................. 13 Canada modem statements ............................................................................................... 15 Japan modem statements ................................................................................................. 15 New Zealand modem statements ...................................................................................... 15 Voice support .................................................................................................... 16 Power cord notice ............................................................................................................................... 16 Japan power cord notice .................................................................................................... 16 DC plug of external HP power supply ................................................................................ 17 Macrovision Corporation notice .......................................................................................................... 17 2 Safety notices ................................................................................................................................................ 18 Heat-related safety warning notice ..................................................................................................... 18 Potential safety conditions notice ....................................................................................................... 18 User-replaceable battery notices ........................................................................................................ 18 Headset and earphone volume level notice ....................................................................................... 19 Power cord notices ............................................................................................................................. 19 Cleaning the keyboard ....................................................................................................................... 19 Travel notice ....................................................................................................................................... 19 Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner ...................................... 19 3 Environmental notices ................................................................................................................................. 20 Electronic hardware and battery recycling ......................................................................................... 20 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ....................... 20 Chemical substances ......................................................................................................................... 21 China material content declarations ................................................................................................... 21 Japan material content declaration .................................................................................................... 23 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law ................................................................................................. 24 Turkey EEE regulation ....................................................................................................................... 24 Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances ................................................................................... 24 Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply ............................................................................ 24 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 25 iv 1 Regulatory notices This guide provides country- and region-specific non-wireless and wireless regulatory notices and compliance information for the computer product. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. One or more integrated wireless devices may be installed. In some environments, the use of wireless devices may be restricted. Such restrictions may apply on-board airplanes, in hospitals, near explosives, in hazardous locations, and so on. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of this product, ask for authorization to use it before you turn it on. To identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device, choose the procedure below that corresponds to the operating system running on your computer. For Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Home, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > My Computer. If the left pane, select View System Information > Hardware tab > Device Manager. For Windows Vista, follow these steps:

1. 2. Select Start > Computer > System properties. In the left pane, click Device Manager. For later Windows operating systems, such as Windows 7, follow these steps:

Select Start > Control Panel > System and Security > Device Manager. For non-Windows operating systems, follow the instructions provided by your operating system to identify a hardware device such as a wireless LAN (WLAN) network device. Regulatory markings for your country or region may be located on the bottom of the product, either under the battery, under a user-removable door (or some other user-accessible location), or on the wireless or modem module. To view the FCC IDs for any radio modules in your notebook (Bluetooth, WLAN, or WWAN), follow these steps:

1. 2. 3. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press f10 to enter BIOS Setup. Select the System Configuration menu. The FCC IDs are displayed at the bottom of the screen. 1 CAUTION: Devices not for sale or use in the United States may not have an FCC ID. Federal Communications Commission notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by HP may void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Cables To maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, connections to this device must be made with shielded cables having metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods. 2 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Declaration of Conformity for products marked with the FCC logo

(United States only) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following 2 conditions:

1. 2. This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration, write to Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000 or call HP at 281-514-3333 To identify your product, refer to the part, series, or model number located on the product. Products with wireless LAN devices or HP Mobile Broadband Modules This device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. WARNING! Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation The radiated output power of this device is below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device should be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact is minimized during normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers. During normal operation of tablet PCs and notebook computers with displays equal to or less than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 2.5 cm (1 inch). To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. During normal operation of notebook computers with displays greater than 12 inches: To avoid the possibility of exceeding the FCC radio frequency exposure limits, human proximity to the antennas should not be less than 20 cm (8 inches), including when the computer display is closed. To identify the location of the wireless antennas, refer to the computer user guides. To access the user guides, select Start > Help and Support > User Guides. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. The FCC requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. Federal Communications Commission notice 3 Brazil notice Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Canada notices This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. If this device has WLAN or Bluetooth capability, the device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. CAUTION: When using IEEE 802.11a wireless LAN, this product is restricted to indoor use, due to its operation in the 5.15- to 5.25-GHz frequency range. Industry Canada requires this product to be used indoors for the frequency range of 5.15 GHz to 5.25 GHz to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. High-power radar is allocated as the primary user of the 5.25- to 5.35-GHz and 5.65- to 5.85-GHz bands. These radar stations can cause interference with and/or damage to this device. The antennas for this device are not replaceable. Any attempt at user access will damage your computer. Avis Canadien Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. European Union Regulatory notices Products bearing the CE marking comply with the following EU Directives:

Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Ecodesign Directive 2009/125/EC where applicable CE compliance of this product is valid if powered with the correct CE-marked AC adapter provided by HP. If this product has wired and/or wireless telecommunications functionality, it also complies with the essential requirements of EU Directive R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards

(European Norms) that are listed in the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by HP for this product or product family and available (in English only) either within the product documentation or at the following Web site: www.hp.eu/certificates (type the product number in the search box). The compliance is indicated by one of the following conformity markings placed on the product:

4 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices For non-telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products, such as Bluetooth, within power class below 10 mW. For EU non-harmonized telecommunications products (if applicable, a 4-digit notified body number is inserted between CE and ! (the exclamation mark). Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the product. The telecommunications functionality of this product may be used in the following EU and EFTA countries: Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, and United Kingdom. The telephone connector (not available for all products) is intended for connection to analog telephone networks. NOTE: For products with wireless LAN devices, some countries may have specific obligations or special requirements about the operation of wireless LAN networks such as indoor use only or restrictions of the channels available. Be sure that the country settings of the wireless network are correct. In France, certain restrictions apply for the 2.4-GHz wireless LAN operation of this product. This product may be used indoors for the entire 2400-MHz to 2483.5-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 13). For outdoor use, only the 2400-MHz to 2454-MHz frequency band (channels 1 to 7) may be used. For the latest requirements, see http://www.arcep.fr. The point of contact for regulatory matters is Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS: HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, GERMANY. Products with HP Mobile Broadband Modules THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY RADIATION. The HP Mobile Broadband Module in your notebook is a radio transmitter and receiver. The device is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines that establish permitted levels of RF radiation for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The device also meets the European R&TTE directives, including the protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other person. European Union Regulatory notices 5 The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR).* The SAR was obtained by testing the device at standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR of the device while operating can be well below the maximum value, because the device operates at multiple power levels and uses only the power required to reach the network. When installed in the notebook computer, this device meets RF exposure guidelines when the antennas are positioned at a minimum distance from the body. In order to transmit data or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data or messages may be delayed until such a connection becomes available. Be sure that the recommended distance is observed until the transmission is complete.

*The non-FCC, international guidelines state that the SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. This equipment incorporates a radio transmitting device. In normal use, a separation distance of 20 cm ensures that radio frequency exposure levels comply with the Australian and New Zealand Standards. Ergonomics notice Germany Mobile computers bearing the "GS" approval mark meet the ergonomic requirements and are suitable only for short-time use of VDU tasks. When a mobile computer is used for display work tasks where the Visual Display Unit (VDU) Directive 90/270/EEC is applicable, an adequate external keyboard is required. Depending on the application and task, an adequate external monitor may also be necessary to attain working conditions comparable to a workstation setup. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 This device is intended for use at visual display workplaces in compliance with BildscharbV, only with external keyboard and adequate external monitor. During mobile use with disadvantageous illumination conditions (e.g. direct sun light) reflections may occur which result in reduced readability. Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Ref: EK1-ITB 2000:2008 Das Gert ist fr die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV nur mit externer Tastatur und geeignetem Monitor vorgesehen. 6 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. Japan notices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Wireless LAN 802.11g devices Bluetooth devices Japan notices 7 Wireless LAN, Wireless WAN, and Bluetooth certification markings This product contains certified radio equipment. South Korea notice Mexico notice La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) este equipo puede que no cause interferencia y (2) este equipo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo interferencia que pueda ser causada por la operacin no deseada. Singapore wireless notice Turn off any WWAN devices while you are onboard aircraft. The use of these devices onboard aircraft is illegal, may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, and may disrupt the cellular network. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspension or denial of cellular services to the offender, or legal action, or both. Users are reminded to restrict the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, and where blasting operations are in progress. As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, no part of the human body should be allowed to come too close to the antennas during operation of the equipment. This device has been designed to comply with applicable requirements for exposure to radio waves, based on scientific guidelines that include margins intended to assure the safety of all people, regardless of health and age. These radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the specific absorption rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods, with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. The SAR data information is based on CENELEC's standards EN50360 and EN50361, which use the limit of 2 watts per kilogram, averaged over 10 grams of tissue. 8 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Thailand WWAN wireless notice This telecom equipment has complied with NTC regulations. Taiwan notices Wireless LAN 802.11a devices Wireless LAN 802.11b devices Airline travel notice Use of electronic equipment onboard commercial aircraft is at the discretion of the airline. Thailand WWAN wireless notice 9 User-replaceable battery notices When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general in household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for computer battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, refer to the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. For information about removing a user-replaceable battery, refer to the user guide included with the product. ENERGY STAR compliance As an ENERGY STAR Partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has followed the EPAs enhanced product qualification and certification process to ensure that the products marked with the ENERGY STAR logo are ENERGY STAR qualified per the applicable ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. The following logo appears on all ENERGY STAR-qualified computers:

The ENERGY STAR program for computers was created by the EPA to promote energy efficiency and reduce air pollution through more energy-efficient equipment in homes, offices, and factories. One way that products achieve this goal is by using the Microsoft Windows power management feature to reduce power consumption when the product is not in use. The power management feature allows the computer to initiate a low-power or Sleep mode after a period of user inactivity. When used with an external ENERGY STAR qualified monitor, this feature also supports similar power management features of the monitor. To take advantage of these potential energy savings, the power management feature has been preset to behave in the following ways when the system is operating on AC power:

Turn off the display after 15 minutes Initiate Sleep after 30 minutes The computer exits Sleep when the power/Sleep button is pressed. When the Wake On LAN (WOL) feature is enabled, the computer can also exit Sleep in response to a network signal. Additional information on the potential energy and financial savings of the power management feature can be found on the EPA ENERGY STAR Power Management Web site at http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Additional information on the ENERGY STAR program and its environmental benefits are available on the EPA ENERGY STAR Web site at http://www.energystar.gov. 10 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Laser compliance WARNING! Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified in the laser product installation guide, may result in hazardous radiation exposure. To reduce the risk of exposure to hazardous radiation:

Do not try to open the module enclosure. There are no user-serviceable components inside. Do not operate controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures to the laser device other than those specified in the laser product installation guide. Allow only authorized service providers to repair the unit. This product may be provided with an optical storage device (for example, a CD or DVD drive) and/or a fiber optic transceiver. Each of these devices that contain a laser is classified as a Class 1 Laser Product in accordance with IEC 60825-1 and meets the requirements for safety of that standard. Each laser product complies with US FDA regulations of 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 or complies with those regulations except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50 dated June 24, 2007. Modem notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons when using this device, always follow basic safety precautions, including the following:

Do not use this product near waterfor example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool. Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. Do not use this product to report a gas leak while in the vicinity of the leak. Always disconnect the modem cable before opening the equipment enclosure or touching an uninsulated modem cable, jack, or internal component. If this product was not provided with a telephone line cord, use only No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Do not plug a modem or telephone cable into the RJ-45 (network) jack. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Telecommunications device approvals The telecommunications device in the computer is approved for connection to the telephone network in the countries and regions whose approval markings are indicated on the product label located on the bottom of the computer or on the modem. Refer to the user guide included with the product to ensure that the product is configured for the country or region in which the product is located. Selecting a country or region other than the one in which it is located may cause the modem to be configured in a way that violates the telecommunication regulations/laws of that country or region. In addition, the modem may not function properly if the correct country or region selection is not made. If, when you select a country or region, a message appears that states that the country or region is not supported, this means that the modem has not been approved for use in this country or region and thus should not be used. Laser compliance 11 U.S. modem statements This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the bottom of the computer or on the modem is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. Provide this information to the telephone company if you are requested to do so. Applicable certification jack USOC = RJ11C. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most but not all locations, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label. If this HP equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But, if advance notice isn't practical, the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary. The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted telephone service. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, call technical support. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. You should perform repairs only to the equipment specifically discussed in the Troubleshooting section of the user guide, if one is provided. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure that the installation of this HP equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer. The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including a fax machine, to send any message unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges). In order to program this information into your fax machine, you should complete the steps outlined in the faxing software instructions. 12 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices U.S. modem declarations Refer to the following modem vendor declarations for the modem device installed in your computer:

Modem notices 13 14 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices Canada modem statements This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number, REN, is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all devices does not exceed 5. The REN for this terminal equipment is 1.0. Japan modem statements If the computer does not have the Japanese certification mark on the bottom of the computer, refer to the appropriate certification marking below. The Japanese certification mark for the V.92 56K Data/Fax Modem is below:

New Zealand modem statements The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services. This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances. If this device is equipped with pulse dialing, note that there is no guarantee that Telecom lines will always continue to support pulse dialing. Use of pulse dialing, when this equipment is connected to the same line as other equipment, may give rise to bell tinkle or noise and may also cause a false answer condition. Should such problems occur, the user should not contact the Telecom Faults Service. Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's Telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom's Specifications:

a. b. There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30-minute period for any single manual call initiation. The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. Modem notices 15 c. Where automatic calls are made to different numbers, the equipment shall be set to go on-hook for a period of not less than 5 seconds between the end of one attempt and the beginning of the next attempt. d. The equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered between 3 and 30 seconds of receipt of ringing (So set between 2 and 10). Voice support All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is aware that it is being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its collection, how it is to be used, and what is disclosed to any other party. This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111' Emergency Service. Power cord notice If you were not provided with a power cord for the computer or for an external power accessory intended for use with the computer, you should purchase a power cord that is approved for use in your country or region. The power cord must be rated for the product and for the voltage and current marked on the product's electrical ratings label. The voltage and current rating of the cord should be greater than the voltage and current rating marked on the product. In addition, the diameter of the wire must be a minimum of 0.75 mm/18AWG, and the length of the cord must be between 1.5 m (5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft). If you have questions about the type of power cord to use, contact your authorized service provider. A power cord should be routed so that it is not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon it or against it. Particular attention should be paid to the plug, electrical outlet, and the point where the cord exits from the product. Japan power cord notice 16 Chapter 1 Regulatory notices DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Macrovision Corporation notice This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. Macrovision Corporation notice 17 2 Safety notices Heat-related safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950). Potential safety conditions notice If you notice any of the following conditions (or if you have other safety concerns), do not use the computer: crackling, hissing, or popping sound, or a strong odor or smoke coming from the computer. It is normal for these conditions to appear when an internal electronic component fails in a safe and controlled manner. However, these conditions may also indicate a potential safety issue. Do not assume it is a safe failure. Turn off the computer, disconnect it from its power source, and contact technical support for assistance. User-replaceable battery notices WARNING! Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. WARNING! Keep the battery away from children. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. 18 Chapter 2 Safety notices Headset and earphone volume level notice WARNING! Listening to music at high volume levels and for extended durations can damage ones hearing. To reduce the risk of hearing damage, lower the volume to a safe, comfortable level and reduce the amount of time listening at high levels. For your own safety, before using headsets or earphones, always reset the volume. Some headphones are louder than other headphones, even if the volume control setting is the same. Changing the default audio or equalizer settings might lead to higher volume and should only be done with caution. For your own safety, headsets or earphones used with this product should comply with the headphone limits in EN 50332-2. If the computer includes a headset or earphones, this combination is in compliance to EN 50332-1. Power cord notices WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:

Plug the power cord into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times. Disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet (not by unplugging the power cord from the computer). If provided with a 3-pin attachment plug on the power cord, plug the cord into a grounded (earthed) 3-

pin outlet. Do not disable the power cord grounding pin, for example, by attaching a 2-pin adapter. The grounding pin is an important safety feature. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP should be used with the computer. Cleaning the keyboard WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. Clean the keyboard regularly to prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles that can become trapped beneath the keys. A can of compressed air with a straw extension can be used to blow air around and under the keys to loosen and remove debris. Travel notice WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Norway and Sweden: Cable grounding notice for products with a TV tuner CAUTION: To reduce potential safety issues, use a galvanic isolator when connecting to a cable distribution system. Headset and earphone volume level notice 19 3 Environmental notices This chapter provides country- and region-specific environmental notices and compliance information. Some of these notices may not apply to your product. Electronic hardware and battery recycling HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol means do not dispose of your product with your other household waste. Instead, you should protect human health and the environment by handing over your waste equipment to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. For more information, please contact your household waste disposal service. 20 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Chemical substances HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at http://www.hp.com/go/reach. China material content declarations The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products Part Name Battery Cables Camera Chassis/Other Flash memory card reader Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chemical substances 21 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Floppy disk drive Hard disk drive Headphones I/O PCAs Keyboard Liquid crystal display

(LCD) panel Media (CD/DVD/floppy) Memory Motherboard, processor, heat sinks Mouse Optical disk drive Optional docking device Power adapter Power supply Remote control Smart card/Java card reader Speakers, external TV tuner USB flash memory drive USB hub Web camera Wireless receiver Wireless cards Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) Polybrominated diphenyl ethers

(PBDE) X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment and its amendments. NOTE: The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. 22 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Japan material content declaration A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide material content declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Japan material content declaration 23 Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). Turkey EEE regulation In Conformity with the EEE regulation EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Ukraine Restriction of Hazardous Substances The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

, 3 2008 1057. Perchlorate materialspecial handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. This products real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California. 24 Chapter 3 Environmental notices Index A airline travel notice 9 B battery notice 10, 18, 24 battery recycling 20 Brazil notice 4 C cable grounding notice 19 Canada modem statement 15 Canada notices 4 Canadian French notices 4 China Material Content Declarations 21 D DC plug of external HP power supply notice 17 Declaration of Conformity 3 disposal notices battery 24 battery, user replacement 10 equipment 20 E electronic hardware and battery recycling 20 ENERGY STAR compliance 10 environmental notices 20 equipment disposal notice 20 ergonomics notice 6 European Union notices 4 F Federal Communications Commission cables 2 modifications 2 notice 2 G GS Notice 6 H hardware device, identifying 1 headset and earphone volume level notice 19 J Japan material content declaration 23 Japan modem statement 15 Japan notice 7 Japan power cord notice 16 K keyboard notice 19 L laser safety notice 11 M Macrovision Corporation notice Mexico Sustainable Energy Use 17 Law 24 Mexico wireless notice 8 modem notices 11 modem statements Canada 15 Japan 15 New Zealand 15 U.S. 12 modifications, Federal Communications Commission 2 notices airline travel 9 battery 10, 24 battery, user replacement 18 Brazil 4 Canada 4 Canadian French 4 DC plug of external HP power supply 17 environmental 20 equipment disposal 20 ergonomics 6 European Union 4 Federal Communications Commission 2 headset and earphone volume level 19 Japan 7 Japan power cord 16 keyboard 19 laser safety 11 Macrovision Corporation 17 Mexico 8 modem 11 perchlorate material 24 power cords 16, 19 Singapore 8 South Korea 8 Taiwan 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice 9 travel 19 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances 24 N New Zealand modem statement 15 P power cord notice 16, 19 Index 25 R recycling, electronic hardware and battery 20 S Singapore wireless notice 8 South Korea notice 8 T Taiwan notice 9 Thailand WWAN wireless notice travel notice 19 TV tuner, cable grounding notice 9 19 U U.S. modem statement 12 Ukraine restriction of hazardous substances notice 24 V voice support 16 volume level notice, headset and earphone 19 W wireless LAN devices 3 26 Index

Informations sur les rglementations, la scurit et les conditions d'utilisation Manuel de l'utilisateur Copyright 2012 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth est une marque dtenue par son propritaire et utilise sous licence par Hewlett-Packard Company. ENERGY STAR est une marque dpose du gouvernement des tats-Unis. Java est une marque dpose de Sun Microsystems. Microsoft, Windows et Windows Vista sont des marques dposes de Microsoft Corporation aux tats-Unis. Les informations contenues dans ce document peuvent tre modifies sans pravis. Les garanties relatives aux produits et aux services HP sont dcrites dans les dclarations de garantie limite expresse qui les accompagnent. Aucun lment du prsent document ne peut tre interprt comme constituant une garantie supplmentaire. HP ne saurait tre tenu pour responsable des erreurs ou omissions de nature technique ou rdactionnelle qui pourraient subsister dans le prsent document. Troisime dition : septembre 2012 Deuxime dition : juillet 2012 Premire dition : mars 2012 Rfrence du document : 689409-053 propos de ce manuel Ce manuel fournit des informations sur les rglementations, la scurit et les conditions d'utilisation en conformit avec les rglementations amricaines, canadiennes et internationales en matire d'ordinateurs portables, d'ordinateurs de bureau, de clients lgers et de stations de travail personnelles. AVERTISSEMENT ! Le non-respect des instructions expose l'utilisateur des risques potentiellement trs graves. ATTENTION : Le non-respect des instructions prsente des risques, tant pour le matriel que pour les informations qu'il contient. REMARQUE : Le texte ainsi dfini fournit des informations importantes supplmentaires. iii iv propos de ce manuel Sommaire 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables ................................................................................ 1 Rglementation FCC ............................................................................................................................ 3 Modifications ........................................................................................................................ 3 Cbles .................................................................................................................................. 3 Dclaration de conformit des produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) ....... 4 Produits avec appareils sans fil LAN ou modules HP Mobile Broadband ........................... 4 Avis pour le Brsil ................................................................................................................................. 5 Avis pour le Canada ............................................................................................................................. 5 Avis pour l'Union europenne .............................................................................................................. 6 Dclaration de conformit .................................................................................................... 6 Produits quips de modules sans fil (EMF) ....................................................... 7 Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) ................. 7 Avis sur l'ergonomie ............................................................................................ 8 Allemagne (texte en franais) ............................................................. 8 Allemagne (texte en allemand) ........................................................... 8 Avis pour le Japon ................................................................................................................................ 9 Priphriques LAN, priphriques WAN et marques de certification pour les priphriques Bluetooth ..................................................................................................... 10 Avis pour la Core du Sud ................................................................................................................. 10 Avis pour le Mexique .......................................................................................................................... 10 Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour .................................................................................... 11 Avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande ................................................................... 11 Avis pour Tawan ................................................................................................................................ 11 Priphriques WLAN 802.11a ........................................................................................... 11 Priphriques WLAN 802.11b ........................................................................................... 12 Avis sur les utilisations en vol ............................................................................................................. 12 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur ............................................................................ 12 Conformit ENERGY STAR ............................................................................................................ 12 Conformit du laser ............................................................................................................................ 13 Avis sur les modems .......................................................................................................................... 14 Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication ................................................. 14 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis .......................................................................... 14 v Dclarations sur les modems pour les tats-Unis ............................................................. 16 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada ................................................................................ 17 Avis sur les modems pour le Japon ................................................................................... 17 Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande ................................................................ 17 Support vocal .................................................................................................... 18 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation .................................................................................................... 18 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon ............................................................. 18 Prise CC de la source d'alimentation externe HP .............................................................. 18 Avis de Macrovision Corporation ........................................................................................................ 19 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles ...................................................................................................................................................... 20 Avis sur les modems .......................................................................................................................... 20 Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication ................................................. 20 Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis .......................................................................... 21 Avis sur les modems pour le Canada ................................................................................ 22 Avis sur les modems pour le Japon ................................................................................... 22 Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande ................................................................ 22 Assistance vocale ............................................................................................. 23 Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique ............................................................................................ 23 Avis de la FCC ................................................................................................................... 24 Modifications ..................................................................................................... 24 Cbles ............................................................................................................... 24 Dclaration de conformit pour les produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) ...................................................................................................... 25 Produits quips de priphriques LAN sans fil ............................................... 25 Dclaration sur les tlcommunications pour l'Australie ................................................... 25 Avis pour le Brsil .............................................................................................................. 26 Avis pour le Canada .......................................................................................................... 26 Avis pour l'Union europenne ............................................................................................ 26 Dclaration de conformit ................................................................................. 26 Produits quips de modules sans fil ............................................... 27 Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/

fax) .................................................................................................... 28 Avis sur l'ergonomie ......................................................................... 28 Avis pour le Japon ............................................................................................................. 28 Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN et Bluetooth ....................... 29 Avis pour la Core du Sud ................................................................................................. 29 Avis pour le Mexique ......................................................................................................... 30 Avis pour Tawan ............................................................................................................... 30 vi 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables ....................................................................................... 31 Notice d'avertissement relative la chaleur ....................................................................................... 31 Avis sur les risques lis la scurit .................................................................................................. 31 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur ............................................................................ 32 Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs ................................................................ 32 Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation .................................................................................................... 33 Nettoyage du clavier ........................................................................................................................... 33 Avis sur les dplacements .................................................................................................................. 33 Avis de scurit pour la Chine ............................................................................................................ 34 Chine : avis sur l'altitude .................................................................................................... 34 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales .......................................... 34 Norvge et Sude : notice de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips d'un tuner TV ... 34 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles ...................................................................................................................................................... 35 Informations importantes relatives la scurit ................................................................................. 35 Conditions d'installation ...................................................................................................................... 36 Avis sur le remplacement de la batterie ............................................................................................. 36 Avis sur le volume des casques et des couteurs ............................................................................. 37 Informations de scurit relatives au laser ......................................................................................... 37 Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation et au cordon d'alimentation ............................................. 37 Exigences relatives la mise la terre des alimentations de classe 1 ............................. 37 Danemark .......................................................................................................... 38 Finlande ............................................................................................................ 38 Norvge ............................................................................................................. 38 Sude ................................................................................................................ 38 Exigences relatives l'alimentation ................................................................................... 38 Pour une utilisation en Norvge ........................................................................ 38 Cordons d'alimentation requis ........................................................................................... 39 Spcifications du cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon ...................................................... 39 Risque de pincement .......................................................................................................................... 39 Avis de scurit pour la Chine ............................................................................................................ 40 Chine : avis sur l'altitude .................................................................................................... 40 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales .......................................... 40 Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne .................................................................................................... 41 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables ...................................................... 42 Recyclage du matriel lectronique et de la batterie ......................................................................... 42 Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs ........................................................................... 42 Substances chimiques ....................................................................................................................... 42 Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine .............................................................................................. 43 vii Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) ....................................... 43 Dclaration de contenu de l'quipement pour le Japon ..................................................................... 46 Loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie ........................................................................... 46 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie .................................................................................................... 46 Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine ................................................... 46 Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire ................... 46 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles .......................................................................................................................................... 47 Recyclage du matriel lectronique et des batteries .......................................................................... 47 Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs ........................................................................... 47 Conformit ENERGY STAR (certains modles) .............................................................................. 47 Substances chimiques ....................................................................................................................... 49 Avis sur le mercure ............................................................................................................................. 49 Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire ................... 49 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) ....................................... 49 The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content ................... 50 Dclarations IT ECO .......................................................................................................................... 51 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon (RoHS) ....................................... 52 Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie) ......................................................................................................... 52 Rglementation EEE de la Turquie .................................................................................................... 52

(restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine) .............................................................................................................. 53 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 54 viii 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Ce chapitre fournit des avis de rglementation spcifiques des pays et des rgions concernant les produits filaires et sans fil, ainsi que des informations de conformit concernant l'ordinateur. Certains de ces avis peuvent ne pas s'appliquer votre produit. Un ou plusieurs priphriques sans fil intgrs peuvent tre installs. Dans certains environnements, l'utilisation d'appareils sans fil peut tre limite. Ces restrictions peuvent s'appliquer dans les avions, dans les hpitaux, proximit d'explosifs, dans des lieux dangereux, etc. Si vous n'tes pas sr des rgles qui s'appliquent ce produit, demandez si vous pouvez l'utiliser avant de le mettre sous tension. Pour identifier un priphrique matriel, tel qu'un priphrique rseau LAN sans fil (WLAN), choisissez la procdure ci-dessous qui correspond au systme d'exploitation excut sur votre ordinateur. Sous Windows Vista, procdez comme suit :

1. Slectionnez Dmarrer > Ordinateur > Proprits systme. 2. Dans le volet gauche, cliquez sur Gestionnaire de priphriques. Sous Windows 7, procdez comme suit :

Slectionnez Dmarrer > Panneau de configuration > Systme et scurit > Gestionnaire de priphriques. Sous Windows 8, procdez comme suit :

1. Dans l'cran d'accueil, tapez c, puis slectionnez Panneau de configuration. 2. Slectionnez Systme et scurit, puis slectionnez Gestionnaire de priphriques dans la zone Systme. La liste de tous les priphriques installs sur votre ordinateur s'affiche. Pour les systmes d'exploitation non Windows, suivez les instructions fournies par votre systme d'exploitation pour identifier un priphrique matriel tel qu'un priphrique rseau LAN sans fil

(WLAN). Des tiquettes de rglementation spcifiques votre pays ou rgion peuvent tre apposes sous le produit : sous la batterie, sous une trappe accessible par l'utilisateur (ou tout autre emplacement accessible par l'utilisateur), sur le module sans fil ou sur le modem. 1 Sous Windows 7, pour consulter le numro d'identification FCC d'un module radio de votre ordinateur portable (par exemple, Bluetooth, WLAN ou WWAN), procdez comme suit :

1. 2. 3. Allumez ou redmarrez l'ordinateur puis appuyez sur echap lorsque le message Press the ESC key for Startup Menu (Pour accder au menu de dmarrage, appuyez sur la touche echap) s'affiche en bas de l'cran. Appuyez sur f10 pour accder au BIOS. Slectionnez le menu System Configuration (Configuration du systme). Sous Windows 8, procdez comme suit :

1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension ou redmarrez-le, puis appuyez sur la touche echap lorsque le message Press the ESC key for Startup Menu (Pour accder au menu de dmarrage, appuyez sur la touche echap) apparat en bas de l'cran. 2. Appuyez sur f10 pour accder Computer Setup. Les identifiants FCC sont affichs en bas de l'cran. ATTENTION : Les appareils qui ne sont pas destins la vente ou une utilisation aux tats-Unis ne possdent peut-tre pas d'identifiants FCC. 2 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Rglementation FCC Le prsent quipement a t test et dclar conforme aux limites d'un appareil numrique de Classe B, telles que dfinies dans l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences prjudiciables dans un environnement rsidentiel. Le prsent quipement gnre, utilise et peut mettre une nergie de radiofrquence et, s'il n'est pas install et utilis conformment aux instructions, peut entraner des interfrences prjudiciables pour les radiocommunications. Cependant, tout risque d'interfrences ne peut tre totalement exclu dans certains environnements spcifiques. Si ce matriel devait provoquer des interfrences avec une radio ou un tlviseur, ce qu'il est facile de dceler en teignant puis en rallumant ce matriel, il est alors vivement conseill l'utilisateur d'essayer de supprimer ces interfrences en prenant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes :

Rorienter ou repositionner l'antenne de rception. loigner le matriel informatique du rcepteur. Brancher le matriel informatique sur la prise d'un circuit autre que celui sur lequel est branch le rcepteur. Demander conseil un revendeur ou un technicien de radio ou de tlvision expriment. Modifications La FCC stipule que l'utilisateur doit tre inform que toute modification opre sur l'appareil, n'ayant pas t expressment approuve par HP, peut entraner l'annulation des droits d'exploitation du produit dont bnficie l'utilisateur. Cbles Pour tre conformes la rglementation de la FCC, les connexions d'entre de l'appareil doivent tre tablies avec des cbles blinds munis d'embouts de connecteurs RFI/EMI mtalliques. Rglementation FCC 3 Dclaration de conformit des produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) Cet appareil est conforme l'article 15 des rglementations FCC. Son utilisation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes :

1. Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interfrences nuisibles. 2. Cet appareil doit accepter toutes interfrences reues, notamment des interfrences pouvant provoquer un fonctionnement non voulu. Si vous souhaitez poser des questions sur le produit qui ne sont pas en rapport avec cette dclaration, crivez l'adresse suivante :

Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, TX 77269-2000, tats-Unis Pour toute question concernant cette dclaration FCC, crivez-nous l'adresse suivante :

Hewlett-Packard Company P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, TX 77269-2000, tats-Unis ou appelez HP au (281) 514-3333. Pour identifier le produit, reportez-vous au numro de rfrence, de srie ou de modle inscrit sur le produit. Produits avec appareils sans fil LAN ou modules HP Mobile Broadband Cet appareil ne doit pas tre situ proximit d'une autre antenne ou d'un metteur, ni fonctionner en mme temps. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux rayonnements de frquence radio La puissance de sortie mise par cet appareil est nettement infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par le FCC. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant le fonctionnement normal des tablettes et des ordinateurs portables. Pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont infrieurs ou gaux 30,5 cm (12 pouces) : pour viter de dpasser les limites d'expositions aux frquences radio dictes dans la rglementation FCC, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 2,5 cm (1 pouce) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Pendant le fonctionnement normal d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont suprieurs 30,5 cm

(12 pouces) : Pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par la FCC, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur, y compris lorsque l'cran de l'ordinateur est ferm. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. 4 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables ATTENTION : Lorsque vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, abstenez-vous d'utiliser ce matriel l'extrieur. En effet, il fonctionne dans la plage de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. La FCC exige que ce matriel soit utilis l'intrieur pour la plage de frquences comprise entre 5,15 et 5,25 GHz, afin de rduire les risques d'interfrence avec les systmes de satellites du service mobile du canal commun. Un radar puissance leve est allou comme premier utilisateur des bandes de frquence allant de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz. Ces stations radar peuvent entraner des interfrences avec cet appareil et/ou l'endommager. Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. Este equipamento atende aos limites de Taxa de Absoro Especfica referente exposio a campos eltricos, magnticos e eletromagnticos de radiofreqncias adotados pela ANATEL. Avis pour le Canada Cet appareil numrique de Classe B respecte toutes les exigences des rglementations canadiennes sur les quipements pouvant causer des interfrences. Si ce priphrique est quip de fonctions WLAN ou Bluetooth, il est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence dictes par Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis deux conditions : (1) ce priphrique ne doit pas gnrer d'interfrence et (2) ce priphrique doit supporter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris les interfrences qui pourraient entraner un mauvais fonctionnement. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio : la puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant son fonctionnement normal. Pendant le fonctionnement normal de tablettes et d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont infrieurs ou gaux 30,5 cm (12 pouces) : pour viter de dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 2,5 cm (1 pouce) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. Pendant le fonctionnement normal d'ordinateurs portables dont les crans sont suprieurs 30,5 cm

(12 pouces) : pour viter tout risque de dpassement des limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, les antennes ne doivent pas se trouver moins de 20 cm (8 pouces) de l'utilisateur, y compris lorsque l'cran de l'ordinateur est ferm. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous aux manuels de l'utilisateur qui accompagnent votre ordinateur. ATTENTION : Lorsque vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, abstenez-vous d'utiliser ce matriel l'extrieur. En effet, il fonctionne dans la plage de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Industrie Canada exige que ce matriel soit utilis l'intrieur pour la plage de frquences comprise entre 5,15 et 5,25 GHz, afin de rduire les risques d'interfrence avec les systmes de satellites du service mobile du canal commun. Un radar puissance leve est allou comme premier utilisateur des bandes de frquence allant de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz. Ces stations radar peuvent entraner des interfrences avec cet appareil et/ou l'endommager. Les antennes de ce priphrique ne sont pas remplaables. Toute tentative d'accs par l'utilisateur endommagera l'ordinateur. Avis pour le Brsil 5 Avis pour l'Union europenne Dclaration de conformit Les produits portant la marque CE sont conformes une ou plusieurs directives de l'UE suivantes, le cas chant :

Directive relative la basse tension 2006/95/CE Directive EMC 2004/108/CE Directive Ecodesign 2009/125/CE Directive R&TTE 1999/5/CE Directive RoHS 2011/65/CE La conformit CE de ce produit est uniquement valable si ce dernier est aliment par un adaptateur secteur estampill CE (le cas chant) et un cordon d'alimentation fournis par HP. Reportez-vous la section Cordons d'alimentation requis la page 39. La conformit ces directives implique la conformit aux normes europennes harmonises applicables (normes europennes) qui sont prsentes dans la dclaration de conformit de l'UE dicte par HP pour ce produit ou cette gamme de produits et disponibles soit dans la documentation du produit soit sur le site Web suivant : www.hp.eu/certificates (effectuez une recherche partir du nom de modle du produit ou de son numro de produit, accessible sur l'tiquette de conformit). La conformit est reprsente par la marque de conformit CE ci-aprs. Pour certains produits de tlcommunications, le numro 4 chiffres d'un organisme de certification peut tre ajout en suffixe. Reportez-vous l'tiquette de conformit appose sur le produit. La fonctionnalit de tlcommunications de ce produit peut tre utilise dans les pays de l'Union europenne et de l'AELE suivants : Allemagne, Autriche, Belgique, Bulgarie, Chypre, Danemark, Espagne, Estonie, Finlande, France, Grce, Hongrie, Irlande, Islande, Lettonie, Liechtenstein, Lituanie, Luxembourg, Malte, Norvge, Pays-Bas, Pologne, Portugal, Rpublique tchque, Roumanie, Royaume-Uni, Slovaquie, Slovnie, Sude et Suisse. Pour toute question portant sur les rglementations, contactez Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Dept./MS cette adresse : HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, ALLEMAGNE. 6 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Produits quips de modules sans fil (EMF) CET APPAREIL EST CONFORME AUX NORMES INTERNATIONALES EN MATIRE D'EXPOSITION AUX RAYONNEMENTS DE FRQUENCE RADIO. Le module sans fil intgr votre ordinateur portable est un metteur et rcepteur radio. Cet appareil est conu pour ne pas dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dfinies par des directives internationales (ICNIRP). Ces limites sont dfinies dans le cadre de directives qui tablissent les niveaux autoriss de rayonnements de frquence radio pour l'ensemble de la population. Ces directives, dictes par des organismes scientifiques indpendants, s'appuient sur une valuation rgulire et minutieuse de diffrentes tudes scientifiques. Cet appareil est galement conforme aux directives R&TTE europennes relatives la protection de la sant et de la scurit des personnes. La norme d'exposition dfinie pour les appareils mobiles utilise une unit de mesure appele SAR

(Specific Absorption Rate, taux d'absorption spcifique).* Ce taux a t obtenu via des tests au cours desquels les appareils ont effectu des transmissions au niveau de puissance certifi le plus lev, dans toutes les bandes de frquence. Le taux SAR rel de l'appareil en cours de fonctionnement peut tre bien infrieur la valeur maximale dfinie, dans la mesure o il fonctionne diffrents niveaux de puissance et utilise uniquement la puissance requise pour atteindre le rseau. Install dans l'ordinateur portable, cet appareil est conforme aux directives en matire d'exposition aux frquences radio lorsque les antennes se trouvent une distance minimale du corps. Pour transmettre des donnes ou des messages, l'appareil doit disposer d'une connexion de qualit au rseau. Dans certains cas, les transmissions de donnes ou de messages peuvent tre retardes jusqu' ce qu'une connexion soit disponible. Veillez respecter la distance conseille jusqu' la fin de la transmission.

*Les directives internationales autres que celles de la FCC indiquent que la limite SAR pour les appareils mobiles utiliss par le grand public est de 2 watts/kilogramme (W/kg), calcul sur une moyenne de 10 grammes de masse tissulaire. Ces directives incluent une marge de scurit importante pour une protection accrue du grand public et pour tenir compte des variations dans les mesures. Les valeurs SAR peuvent varier selon les exigences locales en matire de reporting et selon la bande du rseau. Cet quipement intgre un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes australiennes et no-zlandaises. Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) Le produit ci-joint est conforme aux spcifications de la directive 1999/5/CE (annexe II) sur les quipements hertziens et quipements terminaux de tlcommunications et porte en consquence la marque CE. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les rseaux tlphoniques publics commuts

(RTPC) nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays/rgions, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du RTPC. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. L'quipement a t conu pour fonctionner avec les rseaux DTMF analogiques. Cet quipement peut connatre des difficults d'interconnexion sur les rseaux RTPC prenant uniquement en charge la composition impulsions. Contactez votre oprateur rseau pour bnficier d'une aide supplmentaire. Avis pour l'Union europenne 7 Avis sur l'ergonomie Allemagne (texte en franais) Lorsqu'un ordinateur portable est utilis sur une station de travail professionnelle dans le cadre d'un travail sur cran de visualisation o la directive 90/270/CEE relative aux crans de visualisation est applicable, un clavier externe adapt est recommand. Selon l'application et le travail ralis, un moniteur externe adapt peut galement tre ncessaire pour obtenir des conditions de travail comparables celles d'une station de travail. Rf : EK1-ITB 2000 (certification GS volontaire) Les ordinateurs portables portant la marque d'homologation GS sont conformes aux exigences en matire d'ergonomie. Sans clavier externe, ils sont uniquement adapts aux tches ponctuelles sur cran de visualisation. Une utilisation mobile dans de mauvaises conditions de luminosit (par exemple, lumire directe du soleil) peut occasionner des reflets et donc rduire la lisibilit. Allemagne (texte en allemand) Wird ein mobiler Computer fr Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben verwendet, wo die Richtlinie 90/270/EEG

(Bildschirmarbeitsrichtlinie) anzuwenden ist, wird eine geeignete externe Tastatur notwendig. Abhngig von der Anwendung und der Aufgabe kann ein geeigneter externer Monitor erforderlich sein, um vergleichbare Arbeitsbedingungen zu einem stationren Arbeitsplatz zu erreichen. Rf : EK1-ITB 2000 (freiwillige GS Zertifizierung) Mobile Computer, welche das "GS" Zeichen tragen, entsprechen den ergonomischen Anforderungen und sind nur fr kurzzeitige Benutzung von Bildschirmarbeitsaufgaben geeignet. Bei mobiler Nutzung mit ungnstigen Lichtverhltnissen (z.B. direkte Sonneneinstrahlung) kann es zu Reflexionen und damit zu Einschrnkungen der Lesbarkeit der dargestellten Zeichen kommen. 8 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis pour le Japon Avis pour le Japon 9 Priphriques LAN, priphriques WAN et marques de certification pour les priphriques Bluetooth This product contains certified radio equipment. Avis pour la Core du Sud Avis pour le Mexique Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Si su producto se brinda con accesorios inalmbricos como un teclado o un mouse y necesita identificar el modelo del accesorio, consulte la etiqueta incluida en ese accesorio. 10 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour Mettez hors tension les priphriques WWAN lorsque vous tes bord d'avions. L'utilisation de ces appareils bord d'avions est illgale, peut tre dangereuse pour le fonctionnement de l'avion et risque de perturber le rseau de tlphonie mobile. Le non-respect de cette instruction peut entraner la suspension ou le refus de services cellulaires au contrevenant, ou des actions juridiques, ou les deux. Les utilisateurs doivent limiter l'emploi d'quipement radio dans des dpts de carburant, usines chimiques et l o des explosions sont en cours. Comme pour les autres quipements mobiles de transmission par frquences radiolectriques, il est recommand aux utilisateurs, pour le bon fonctionnement de leur quipement et pour la scurit du personnel, de ne pas trop approcher les antennes du corps humain au cours du fonctionnement de l'quipement. Ce priphrique a t conu pour tre conforme aux exigences applicables pour l'exposition aux ondes radio, en fonction de normes scientifiques qui comprennent des plages destines assurer la scurit de tout le monde, quel que soit l'ge et l'tat de sant. Ces rgles d'exposition aux ondes radio utilisent une unit de mesure appele taux d'absorption spcifique (SAR - Specific Absorption Rate). Les tests relatifs aux taux d'absorption sont mens l'aide de mthodes standardises, le tlphone transmettant son niveau de certifi le plus lev dans toutes les bandes de frquences utilises. Les informations de donnes SAR se basent sur les normes EN50360 et EN50361 de CENELEC, qui utilisent la limite de 2 watts par kilogramme, sur une moyenne de 10 grammes de tissu. Avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN pour la Thalande Cet quipement de tlcommunications est conforme aux rglementations de la NTC. Avis pour Tawan Priphriques WLAN 802.11a Avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour 11 Priphriques WLAN 802.11b Avis sur les utilisations en vol L'utilisation d'quipement lectronique bord d'un avion commercial est laisse la discrtion de la compagnie arienne. Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur Lorsqu'une batterie atteint la fin de sa vie utile, ne la jetez pas avec les dchets mnagers ordinaires. Appliquez les lois et rglementations locales en matire de mise au rebut des batteries d'ordinateur. HP encourage ses clients recycler les quipements lectroniques usags, les cartouches d'impression HP d'origine et les batteries rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site Web HP l'adresse http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour des informations sur le retrait d'une batterie remplaable par l'utilisateur, reportez-vous au manuel de l'utilisateur livr avec le produit. Conformit ENERGY STAR En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, HP a suivi le processus avanc de qualification et de certification des produits de l'EPA pour s'assurer que les produits portant le logo ENERGY STAR respectaient les rglementations ENERGY STAR en matire de rendement lectrique. Le logo suivant apparat sur tous les ordinateurs respectant les spcifications ENERGY STAR :

Le programme ENERGY STAR pour les ordinateurs a t cr par l'EPA pour encourager l'efficacit nergtique et rduire la pollution atmosphrique grce l'utilisation d'quipements meilleur 12 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables rendement lectrique chez soi, au bureau et dans les usines. Une manire d'atteindre cet objectif consiste utiliser la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation de Microsoft Windows pour rduire la consommation d'nergie lorsque le produit n'est pas utilis. Cette fonction permet la mise en mode veille de l'ordinateur aprs une priode d'inactivit de l'utilisateur. Lorsque vous utilisez cette fonction avec un moniteur conforme au programme ENERGY STAR, les fonctions de gestion de l'alimentation du moniteur sont galement prises en charge. Pour profiter de ces conomies d'nergie potentielles, la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation est prconfigure comme suit lorsque le systme fonctionne sur secteur :

Dsactivation de l'cran aprs 10 minutes Mise en veille aprs 20 minutes Le mode veille est dsactiv par une simple pression sur le bouton d'alimentation/de veille. Lorsque la fonction Wake On LAN d'veil par appel rseau est active, le mode veille peut galement tre dsactiv en rponse un signal du rseau. Vous trouverez des informations complmentaires sur les conomies nergtiques et financires ralisables avec la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation sur le site Web du programme ENERGY STAR de l'U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), cette adresse http://www.energystar.gov/

powermanagement. Vous trouverez galement des informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR et ses avantages pour l'environnement sur le site Web ENERGY STAR de l'U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), cette adresse http://www.energystar.gov. Conformit du laser AVERTISSEMENT ! L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles indiques dans ce document ou dans le manuel d'installation d'appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de pice rparable par l'utilisateur. N'utilisez pas de commandes, n'excutez aucun rglage ni aucune procdure au priphrique laser autre que ceux qui figurent dans le manuel d'installation du produit laser. Seul un mainteneur agr est autoris rparer l'unit. Ce produit peut tre fourni avec un priphrique de stockage optique (par exemple, un lecteur de CD ou DVD) et/ou un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Chacun de ces appareils qui contient un laser est class comme produit laser de classe 1 conformment la norme CEI/EN 60825-1 et rpond aux critres de scurit de cette norme. Chaque produit laser est conforme aux paragraphes 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 des rglementations FDA des tats-Unis ou est conforme ces rglementations l'exception des dviations relatives l'avis sur le laser No. 50, en date du 24 juin 2007. Conformit du laser 13 Avis sur les modems AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie, d'lectrocution et de blessures pendant l'utilisation de cet appareil, suivez systmatiquement les rgles de scurit de base suivantes :

N'utilisez pas l'appareil proximit d'eau, par exemple prs d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier ou d'une piscine, ou encore dans une cave humide. vitez d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage. Il existe en effet un risque d'lectrocution d la foudre. N'utilisez jamais cet appareil pour signaler une fuite de gaz, si vous vous trouvez proximit de la fuite. Dbranchez systmatiquement le cble du modem avant d'ouvrir l'enceinte de l'appareil ou de toucher un cble modem non isol, une prise jack ou un composant interne. Si cet appareil n'a pas t fourni avec un cordon tlphonique, n'utilisez qu'un cordon tlphonique No. 26 AWG ou suprieur. Ne branchez pas un cble de modem ou de tlphone dans la prise rseau (RJ-45). GARDEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication Le priphrique de tlcommunication de votre ordinateur est homologu pour une connexion au rseau tlphonique des pays et rgions dont le certificat d'homologation apparat sur l'tiquette du produit appose sur la base de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Pour vrifier que ce matriel est configur pour le pays ou la rgion o il se trouve, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation qui l'accompagne. Si vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion autre que celui ou celle dans lequel se trouve le modem, il risque de violer les lois de tlcommunication du pays ou de la rgion. De plus, votre modem risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous ne slectionnez pas le bon pays ou la bonne rgion. Si, lorsque vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion, un message indique que ce pays ou cette rgion n'est pas compatible, c'est que le modem n'a pas t agr dans ce pays ou cette rgion et ne doit donc pas tre utilis. Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Cet quipement est conforme l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Une tiquette appose sur la face infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem comporte, entre autres informations, un identificateur de produit au format amricain : AAAEQ##TXXXX. Fournissez ces informations la compagnie tlphonique si elle vous le demande. Homologation applicable prise USOC = RJ11C. Les prises utilises pour connecter cet quipement aux cbles lectriques des lieux et au rseau tlphonique doivent tre conformes l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions approuves par l'ACTA. Un cordon tlphonique et une prise modulaire conformes FCC sont livrs avec cet quipement. Il est conu pour tre branch sur une prise modulable galement conforme. Pour des dtails, reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation. Le REN permet de dterminer le nombre de priphriques pouvant tre raccords sur une ligne tlphonique. Si un nombre excessif d'appareils est prsent sur la ligne tlphonique, ceux-ci risquent de ne pas rpondre un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des cas (mais pas toujours), la somme des REN des priphriques raccords sur une ligne ne doit pas dpasser cinq (5). Pour tre sr du nombre d'appareils pouvant tre connects une mme ligne (dtermin par le numro REN), contactez la compagnie de tlphone locale. Pour les produits agrs aprs le 23 juillet 2001, le REN 14 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables fait partie de l'identificateur du produit qui est au format amricain : AAAEQ##TXXXX. Les chiffres reprsents par le signe ## constituent le REN sans virgule (par exemple, 03 reprsente un REN de 0,3). Pour les produits antrieurs cette date, le REN est affich sparment sur l'tiquette. Si cet quipement HP dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie de tlphone vous avisera par avance qu'une interruption de service peut tre requise. Si la compagnie de tlphone ne peut pas vous aviser par avance, vous serez inform ds que possible. Vous serez galement inform de vos droits de rclamation auprs de la FCC si vous le jugez ncessaire. La compagnie de tlphone peut apporter des modifications ses quipements, oprations ou procdures pouvant affecter le bon fonctionnement de votre matriel. Si cela se produit, la compagnie de tlphone vous informera par avance pour vous permettre d'apporter les modifications requises afin d'assurer un service tlphonique sans interruption. Si vous rencontrez des problmes avec cet quipement, contactez le support technique. S'il dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique peut vous demander de le dconnecter jusqu'

ce que le problme soit rsolu. Les seules rparations que vous pouvez effectuer sont celles qui sont prsentes dans la section Rsolution des problmes du manuel de l'utilisateur, si ce dernier est fourni. Le raccord des lignes partages est soumis aux tarifs en vigueur dans votre pays. Pour plus d'informations, contactez les commissions d'utilit publique, la commission de service public ou les commissions d'entreprise. Si votre domicile est quip d'un dispositif d'alarme spcial connect la ligne tlphonique, vrifiez que l'installation de cet quipement HP ne dsactive pas ce dispositif. Si vous avez des questions sur ce qui peut dsactiver le dispositif d'alarme, consultez votre compagnie de tlphone ou un installateur qualifi. La loi de 1991 sur la protection des usagers du tlphone interdit l'utilisation d'un ordinateur ou de tout autre dispositif lectronique, y compris les tlcopieurs, pour l'envoi d'un message, moins que ne soit inscrit clairement sur ce message (dans la marge, le haut ou le bas de chaque page ou sur la premire page) la date et l'heure de l'envoi ainsi que l'identit de la socit expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier, ainsi que le numro de tlphone de la machine expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier. Le numro de tlphone ne doit pas tre un numro commenant par 900 ni un numro dont le cot dpasse celui d'un appel local ou longue distance. Pour programmer ces informations dans votre tlcopieur, reportez-vous aux instructions relatives au logiciel d'envoi de tlcopies. Avis sur les modems 15 Dclarations sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Reportez-vous aux dclarations du fabricant du modem ci-aprs pour le modem install dans votre ordinateur :

16 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis sur les modems pour le Canada Cet quipement est conforme aux spcifications techniques d'Industrie Canada applicables. Le REN indique le nombre maximal d'appareils pouvant tre connects une interface tlphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison d'appareils quelconque condition que la somme des REN de ces dispositifs ne dpasse pas 5. Le REN de ce terminal de communication est 1. Avis sur les modems pour le Japon Si la marque de certification japonaise ne figure pas sur la base de l'ordinateur, reportez-vous la certification ci-dessous. La marque de certification japonaise pour le modem fax/donnes V.92 56K figure ci-dessous :

Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande L'octroi d'un Telepermit pour n'importe quel terminal de tlcommunication indique uniquement que Telecom certifie que l'quipement est bien conforme aux exigences minimales de connexion son rseau. Il ne constitue aucunement une prise de responsabilit quant au produit par Telecom, et n'apporte aucune sorte de garantie. Plus particulirement, il n'apporte aucune garantie que l'quipement fonctionnera correctement et en tous points avec un autre quipement Telepermit d'une marque ou d'un modle diffrent, et n'implique pas qu'un produit est compatible avec l'ensemble des services du rseau Telecom. Quelles que soient les conditions d'utilisation, ce matriel ne peut fonctionner correctement aux vitesses suprieures celles pour lesquelles il a t conu. Telecom dcline toute responsabilit si des difficults devaient apparatre dans de telles circonstances. Si cet quipement est dot de la composition impulsions, Telecom ne garantit pas la prise en charge par la ligne de la composition impulsions. L'utilisation de la numrotation par impulsions, sur une ligne partage par plusieurs dispositifs, peut provoquer un dclenchement de la sonnerie ou des parasites et galement une rponse errone. *Si ce type de problme se produit, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter les services techniques de Telecom Nouvelle-Zlande. Certains paramtres ncessaires pour une conformit avec les exigences Telepermit de Telecom dpendent du matriel (PC) associ cet appareil. Le matriel associ doit tre configur de manire fonctionner dans les limites prescrites pour tre conforme aux spcifications Telecom :

a. Seules 10 tentatives d'appel maximum peuvent tre effectues au mme numro dans un intervalle de 30 minutes, pour n'importe quelle initialisation manuelle d'appel. b. Un intervalle minimum de 30 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. Avis sur les modems 17 c. d. Lorsque des appels automatiques sont effectus divers numros, un intervalle minimum de 5 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. Le matriel doit tre configur de telle manire que les appels soient traits dans un dlai de 3 30 secondes partir de la rception de la sonnerie (il doit donc tre configur entre 2 et 10 secondes). Support vocal Toutes les personnes qui utilisent cet appareil pour enregistrer des conversations tlphoniques doivent se soumettre la lgislation de la Nouvelle-Zlande. Celle-ci exige qu'au moins une des deux parties participant la conversation doit tre au courant de l'enregistrement. En outre, les principes relatifs la nature des informations personnelles recueillies, aux objectifs de leur collecte, leur utilisation et la divulgation de ces informations des tiers, principes rpertoris dans la loi sur la protection de la vie prive de 1993, doivent tre respects. Ce matriel ne doit pas tre configur de manire passer des appels automatiques au numro d'urgence (111) mis en place par Telecom. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation Si votre ordinateur ne vous a pas t livr avec un cordon d'alimentation ou un accessoire d'alimentation secteur compatible avec votre ordinateur, vous devrez acheter un cordon d'alimentation homologu pour votre pays ou votre rgion. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre test et garanti pour le produit, pour la tension et le type de courant inscrits sur l'tiquette des valeurs nominales lectriques du produit. Les valeurs nominales de tension et d'intensit du cordon doivent tre suprieures celles indiques sur l'ordinateur. En outre, le diamtre du cordon doit tre au minimum de 0,75 mm/18 AWG et sa longueur doit tre comprise entre 1,5 m (5 pieds) et 2 m (6.5 pieds). Si vous avez des questions sur le type de cordon d'alimentation utiliser, contactez votre fournisseur de service agr. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation de sorte qu'il ne puisse pas tre pitin ou coinc par des objets. Accordez une attention particulire la fiche, la prise secteur et l'endroit o le cordon sort du botier du portable. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon Prise CC de la source d'alimentation externe HP 18 Chapitre 1 Avis de rglementation sur les ordinateurs portables Avis de Macrovision Corporation Ce produit intgre une technologie de protection des droits d'auteur qui est protge par des revendications de procd de certains brevets amricains et d'autres droits sur la proprit intellectuelle de Macrovision Corporation et d'autres bnficiaires de droits. L'utilisation de cette technologie de protection des droits d'auteur doit tre autorise par Macrovision Corporation et a pour but de permettre un visionnage domestique et d'autres utilisations limites uniquement, sauf autorisation de Macrovision Corporation. L'ingnierie inverse et le dsassemblage sont interdits. Avis de Macrovision Corporation 19 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur les modems AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie, d'lectrocution et de blessures pendant l'utilisation de cet appareil, suivez systmatiquement les rgles de scurit de base suivantes :

N'utilisez pas l'appareil proximit d'eau, par exemple prs d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un vier ou d'une piscine, ou encore dans une cave humide. vitez d'utiliser l'appareil pendant un orage. Il existe en effet un risque d'lectrocution d la foudre. N'utilisez jamais cet appareil, pour signaler une fuite de gaz, si vous vous trouvez proximit de la fuite. Dbranchez systmatiquement le cble du modem avant d'ouvrir l'enceinte de l'appareil ou de toucher un cble modem non isol, une prise jack ou un composant interne. Si cet appareil n'a pas t fourni avec un cordon tlphonique, n'utilisez qu'un cordon tlphonique No. 26 AWG ou suprieur. Ne branchez jamais un cordon de modem ou de tlphone dans la prise RJ-45 (rseau Ethernet). GARDEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS Homologations des priphriques de tlcommunication Le priphrique de tlcommunication de votre ordinateur est homologu pour une connexion au rseau tlphonique des pays et rgions dont le certificat d'homologation apparat sur l'tiquette du produit appose sur la base de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem. Pour vrifier que ce matriel est configur pour le pays ou la rgion o il se trouve, reportez-vous au manuel d'utilisation qui l'accompagne. Si vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion autre que celui ou celle dans lequel se trouve le modem, il risque de violer les lois de tlcommunication du pays ou de la rgion. De plus, votre modem risque de ne pas fonctionner correctement si vous ne slectionnez pas le bon pays ou la bonne rgion. Si, lorsque vous slectionnez un pays ou une rgion, un message indique que ce pays ou cette rgion n'est pas support, c'est que le modem n'a pas t agr dans ce pays ou cette rgion et ne doit donc pas tre utilis. 20 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis Cet quipement est conforme l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions adoptes par l'ACTA. Une tiquette appose sur la face infrieure de l'ordinateur ou sur le modem comporte, entre autres informations, un identificateur de produit au format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. Fournissez ces informations la compagnie tlphonique si elle vous le demande. Homologation applicable prise USOC = RJ11C. Les prises utilises pour connecter cet quipement aux cbles lectriques des lieux et au rseau tlphonique doivent tre conformes l'article 68 des rglementations FCC et aux conditions approuves par l'ACTA. Un cordon tlphonique et une prise modulaire conformes FCC sont livrs avec cet quipement. Il est conu pour tre branch sur une prise modulable galement conforme. Pour des dtails, reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation. Le REN permet de dterminer le nombre de priphriques pouvant tre raccords sur une ligne tlphonique. Si un nombre excessif d'appareils est prsent sur la ligne tlphonique, ceux-ci risquent de ne pas rpondre un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des cas (mais pas toujours), la somme des REN des priphriques raccords sur une ligne ne doit pas dpasser cinq (5). Pour tre sr du nombre d'appareils pouvant tre connects une mme ligne (dtermin par le numro REN), contactez la compagnie de tlphone locale. Pour les produits agrs aprs le 23 juillet 2001, le REN fait partie de l'identificateur du produit qui est au format amricain : AAAEQ##TXXXX. Les chiffres reprsents par le signe ## constituent le REN sans virgule (par exemple, 03 reprsente un REN de 0,3). Pour les produits antrieurs cette date, le REN est affich sparment sur l'tiquette. Si cet quipement HP dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie de tlphone vous avisera par avance qu'une interruption de service peut tre requise. Si la compagnie de tlphone ne peut pas vous aviser par avance, vous serez inform ds que possible. Vous serez galement inform de vos droits de rclamation auprs de la FCC si vous le jugez ncessaire. La compagnie de tlphone peut apporter des modifications ses quipements, oprations ou procdures pouvant affecter le bon fonctionnement de votre matriel. Si cela se produit, la compagnie de tlphone vous informera par avance pour vous permettre d'apporter les modifications requises afin d'assurer un service tlphonique sans interruption. Si vous rencontrez des problmes avec cet quipement, contactez le support technique. S'il dtriore le rseau tlphonique, la compagnie tlphonique peut vous demander de le dconnecter jusqu'

ce que le problme soit rsolu. Les seules rparations que vous pouvez effectuer sont celles qui sont prsentes dans la section Rsolution des problmes du manuel de l'utilisateur, si ce dernier est fourni. Le raccord des lignes partages est soumis aux tarifs en vigueur dans votre pays. Pour plus d'informations, contactez les commissions d'utilit publique, la commission de service public ou les commissions d'entreprise. Si votre domicile est quip d'un dispositif d'alarme spcial connect la ligne tlphonique, vrifiez que l'installation de cet quipement HP ne dsactive pas ce dispositif. Si vous avez des questions sur ce qui peut dsactiver le dispositif d'alarme, consultez votre compagnie de tlphone ou un installateur qualifi. La loi de 1991 sur la protection des usagers du tlphone interdit l'utilisation d'un ordinateur ou de tout autre dispositif lectronique, y compris les tlcopieurs, pour l'envoi d'un message, moins que ne soit inscrit clairement sur ce message (dans la marge, le haut ou le bas de chaque page ou sur la premire page) la date et l'heure de l'envoi ainsi que l'identit de la socit expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier, ainsi que le numro de tlphone de la machine expditrice, de l'entit ou du particulier. Le numro de tlphone ne doit pas tre un numro commenant par 900 ni un numro dont le cot dpasse celui d'un appel local ou longue distance. Avis sur les modems 21 Pour programmer ces informations dans votre tlcopieur, reportez-vous aux instructions relatives au logiciel d'envoi de tlcopies. Avis sur les modems pour le Canada Cet quipement est conforme aux normes techniques Industrie Canada applicables. Le REN donne une indication sur le nombre maximum de priphriques qu'il est possible de relier une interface tlphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut consister en une combinaison de priphriques quelconque condition que la somme des REN de ces dispositifs ne dpasse pas 5. Le REN de ce terminal de communication est 1. Avis sur les modems pour le Japon Si la marque de certification japonaise ne figure pas sur la base de l'ordinateur, reportez-vous la certification ci-dessous. Au Japon, la marque de certification pour le modem LSI Corporation PCI-SV92EX Soft est la suivante :

Avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande L'octroi d'un Telepermit pour n'importe quel terminal de tlcommunication indique uniquement que Telecom certifie que l'quipement est bien conforme aux exigences minimales de connexion son rseau. Il ne constitue aucunement une prise de responsabilit quant au produit par Telecom, et n'apporte aucune sorte de garantie. Plus particulirement, il n'apporte aucune garantie que l'quipement fonctionnera correctement et en tous points avec un autre quipement Telepermit d'une marque ou d'un modle diffrent, et n'implique pas qu'un produit est compatible avec l'ensemble des services du rseau Telecom. Quelles que soient les conditions d'utilisation, ce matriel ne peut fonctionner correctement aux vitesses suprieures celles pour lesquelles il a t conu. Telecom dcline toute responsabilit si des difficults devaient apparatre dans de telles circonstances. Si cet quipement est dot de la composition impulsions, Telecom ne garantit pas la prise en charge par la ligne de la composition impulsions. L'utilisation de la numrotation par impulsions, sur une ligne partage par plusieurs dispositifs, peut provoquer un dclenchement de la sonnerie ou des parasites et galement une rponse errone. Si ce type de problme se produit, l'utilisateur ne doit pas contacter les services techniques de Telecom Nouvelle-Zlande. 22 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Certains paramtres ncessaires pour une conformit avec les exigences Telepermit de Telecom dpendent du matriel (PC) associ cet appareil. Le matriel associ doit tre configur de manire fonctionner dans les limites prescrites pour tre conforme aux spcifications Telecom :

a. Seules 10 tentatives d'appel maximum peuvent tre effectues au mme numro dans un intervalle de 30 minutes, pour n'importe quelle initialisation manuelle d'appel. b. Un intervalle minimum de 30 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. c. d. Lorsque des appels automatiques sont effectus divers numros, un intervalle minimum de 5 secondes doit s'couler entre la fin d'une tentative d'appel et le dbut de la suivante. Le matriel doit tre configur de telle manire que les appels soient traits dans un dlai de 3 30 secondes partir de la rception de la sonnerie (il doit donc tre configur entre 2 et 10 secondes). Assistance vocale Toutes les personnes qui utilisent cet appareil pour enregistrer des conversations tlphoniques doivent se soumettre la lgislation de la Nouvelle-Zlande. Celle-ci exige qu'au moins une des deux parties participant la conversation doit tre au courant de l'enregistrement. En outre, les principes relatifs la nature des informations personnelles recueillies, aux objectifs de leur collecte, leur utilisation et la divulgation de ces informations des tiers, principes rpertoris dans la loi sur la protection de la vie prive de 1993, doivent tre respects. Ce matriel ne doit pas tre configur de manire passer des appels automatiques au numro d'urgence (111) mis en place par Telecom. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique Ce manuel prsente les avis de rglementation relatifs aux fonctions avec et sans fil des diffrents pays et rgions, ainsi que des informations de conformit de l'ordinateur. Certains de ces avis ne s'appliquent peut-tre pas votre produit. Un ou plusieurs priphriques sans fil intgrs peuvent tre installs. Dans certains environnements, l'utilisation d'appareils sans fil peut tre limite. Ces restrictions peuvent s'appliquer dans les avions, dans les hpitaux, prs d'explosifs, dans des lieux dangereux, etc. Si vous n'tes pas sr des rgles qui s'appliquent ce produit, demandez si vous pouvez l'utiliser avant de le mettre sous tension. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 23 Avis de la FCC Cet quipement a t test et trouv conforme aux limitations relatives aux appareils numriques de classe B, en accord avec l'article 15 des rgles de la FCC. Ces limitations sont conues pour offrir une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences dans une installation rsidentielle. Cet quipement produit, utilise et peut mettre de l'nergie sous forme de radiofrquences. S'il n'est pas utilis conformment aux instructions, il peut produire des interfrences nuisibles aux communications radio. Cependant, il n'existe aucune garantie assurant qu'il n'y aura pas d'interfrence dans une installation particulire. Si l'utilisateur constate des interfrences lors de la rception d'missions de radio ou de tlvision (il suffit pour le vrifier d'allumer et d'teindre successivement l'appareil), il devra prendre l'une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes pour les liminer savoir :

Rorienter ou repositionner l'antenne de rception. Accrotre la distance entre le matriel et le rcepteur. Brancher le matriel informatique une prise d'un circuit autre que celui auquel est branch le rcepteur. Demander conseil un revendeur ou un technicien de radio ou de tlvision expriment. Modifications La FCC requiert que l'utilisateur soit averti que toute modification de cet quipement non approuve expressment pas la socit Hewlett-Packard pourrait annuler le droit de l'utilisateur d'utiliser l'quipement. Cbles Les cbles branchs cet quipement doivent tre blinds et comporter des protections de connecteur mtalliques de type RFI/EMI pour tre conformes aux directives et rglementations de la FCC. 24 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Dclaration de conformit pour les produits portant le logo FCC (tats-Unis uniquement) Ce matriel est conforme l'alina 15 de la rglementation de la FCC. Son fonctionnement est sous rserve des deux conditions suivantes :

1. Cet quipement ne doit pas causer d'interfrences nuisibles et 2. Cet quipement doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences capables de causer un mauvais fonctionnement. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de votre produit, crivez-nous l'adresse :

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Si vous avez des questions au sujet de la dclaration FCC, crivez-nous l'adresse :

Hewlett-Packard Company P.O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101 Houston, Texas 77269-2000 Ou appelez-nous au (281) 514-3333. Pour identifier ce produit, communiquez la rfrence ou le numro de srie ou de modle figurant sur le produit. Produits quips de priphriques LAN sans fil Ce produit peut tre quip d'un priphrique de rseau local sans fil. Ce priphrique ne doit pas tre situ au mme endroit ou fonctionner en mme temps qu'une autre antenne ou un autre metteur. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition des missions de radiofrquence La puissance de sortie mise par ce priphrique est infrieure aux limites de la FCC sur l'exposition des missions de radiofrquence. Nanmoins, le priphrique doit tre utilis de faon ce que les risques de contact physique soient rduits pendant le fonctionnement normal de l'appareil. Pendant le fonctionnement normal : Pour viter de dpasser les limites d'expositions aux frquences radio dictes dans la rglementation FCC, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 20 cm

(8 pouces) de l'antenne. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous la documentation qui accompagne l'ordinateur. ATTENTION : Si vous utilisez un rseau local sans fil IEEE 802.11a, l'appareil ne doit tre utilis qu' l'intrieur d'un btiment, car il fonctionne dans une bande de frquences allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Il s'agit d'une rglementation de la FCC visant rduire le risque d'interfrences nuisibles aux systmes mobiles par satellite utilisant les mmes canaux. Les bandes de frquences allant de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz sont rserves aux stations radars trs puissantes. Celles-ci peuvent causer des interfrences et/ou endommager l'appareil. Dclaration sur les tlcommunications pour l'Australie The computer must be connected to the Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008. AVERTISSEMENT ! Modems without integral RJ-11 that are shipped with this computer must be installed only in devices displaying the A-tick. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 25 Avis pour le Brsil Este equipamento opera em carter secundrio, isto , no tem direito a proteo contra interferncia prejudicial, mesmo de estaes do mesmo tipo, e no pode causar interferncia a sistemas operando em carter primrio. ATTENTION : A alimentao de energia predefinida para 220/230Vv. Se voc possuir tomada eltrica de 110/115Vv, por favor, altere a chave na parte traseira do seu computador para a tenso correta. Avis pour le Canada Cet appareil numrique de classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Si cet appareil dispose d'une fonctionnalit WLAN ou Bluetooth, il est conforme aux normes RSS pour les appareil exempts de licence d'Industrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est sous rserve des deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interfrences et

(2) cet appareil doit tolrer toute interfrence, notamment les interfrences pouvant engendrer un mauvais fonctionnement de l'appareil. AVERTISSEMENT ! Exposition aux radiations de frquence radio La puissance de rayonnement de cet appareil est infrieure aux limites d'exposition aux radiations mises par les frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada. Toutefois, l'appareil doit tre utilis de sorte que les possibilits de contact humain soient rduites au maximum pendant son fonctionnement normal. Pendant le fonctionnement normal : Pour viter de dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dictes par Industrie Canada, il est prfrable de ne pas s'approcher plus de 20 cm

(8 pouces) des antennes. Pour identifier l'emplacement des antennes sans fil, reportez-vous la documentation qui accompagne l'ordinateur. ATTENTION : En cas d'utilisation d'un rseau LAN IEEE 802.11a, ce produit doit uniquement tre utilis l'intrieur d'un btiment, en raison de son fonctionnement sur la plage de frquence de 5,15 5,25 GHz. Industrie Canada exige que ce produit soit utilis l'intrieur d'un btiment pour la plage de frquence allant de 5,15 5,25 GHz afin de rduire le risque d'interfrences prjudiciables pour les systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant le mme canal. Les plages de 5,25 5,35 GHz et de 5,65 5,85 GHz sont alloues prioritairement aux radars haute puissance. Ces stations radar peuvent provoquer des interfrences avec cet appareil ou l'endommager. L'antenne de cet appareil ne se remplace pas. Toute tentative de modification par l'utilisateur peut endommager l'ordinateur. Avis pour l'Union europenne Dclaration de conformit Les produits portant la marque CE sont conformes une ou plusieurs directives de l'UE suivantes, le cas chant :

Directive relative la basse tension 2006/95/CE Directive EMC 2004/108/CE Directive Ecodesign 2009/125/CE Directive R&TTE 1999/5/CE Directive RoHS 2011/65/CE 26 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles La conformit CE de ce produit n'est valide que s'il est aliment par un adaptateur secteur estampill CE (le cas chant) et un cordon d'alimentation fournis par HP. Reportez-vous la section Cordons d'alimentation requis la page 39. La conformit ces directives implique la conformit aux normes europennes harmonises applicables (normes europennes) qui sont prsentes dans la dclaration de conformit de l'UE dicte par HP pour ce produit ou cette gamme de produits et disponibles soit dans la documentation du produit soit sur le site Web suivant : www.hp.eu/certificates (effectuez une recherche partir du nom de modle du produit ou de son numro de produit, accessible sur l'tiquette de conformit). La conformit est reprsente par la marque de conformit CE ci-aprs. Pour certains produits de tlcommunications, le numro 4 chiffres d'un organisme de certification peut tre ajout en suffixe. Reportez-vous l'tiquette de conformit appose sur le produit. La fonctionnalit de tlcommunications de ce produit peut tre utilise dans les pays de l'Union europenne et de l'AELE suivants : Allemagne, Autriche, Belgique, Bulgarie, Chypre, Danemark, Espagne, Estonie, Finlande, France, Grce, Hongrie, Irlande, Islande, Lettonie, Liechtenstein, Lituanie, Luxembourg, Malte, Norvge, Pays-Bas, Pologne, Portugal, Rpublique tchque, Roumanie, Royaume-Uni, Slovaquie, Slovnie, Sude et Suisse. Pour toute question portant sur les rglementations, envoyez un courrier : Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Allemagne. Produits quips de modules sans fil CET APPAREIL EST CONFORME AUX NORMES INTERNATIONALES EN MATIRE D'EXPOSITION AUX RAYONNEMENTS DE FRQUENCE RADIO. Le module sans fil intgr votre ordinateur est un metteur et rcepteur radio. Cet appareil est conu pour ne pas dpasser les limites d'exposition aux frquences radio dfinies par des directives internationales (ICNIRP). Ces limites sont dfinies dans le cadre de directives qui tablissent les niveaux autoriss de rayonnements de frquence radio pour l'ensemble de la population. Ces directives, dictes par des organismes scientifiques indpendants, s'appuient sur une valuation rgulire et minutieuse de diffrentes tudes scientifiques. Cet appareil est galement conforme aux directives R&TTE europennes relatives la protection de la sant et de la scurit des personnes. La norme d'exposition dfinie pour les appareils mobiles utilise une unit de mesure appele SAR

(Specific Absorption Rate, taux d'absorption spcifique).* Ce taux a t obtenu via des tests au cours desquels les appareils ont effectu des transmissions au niveau de puissance certifi le plus lev, dans toutes les bandes de frquence. Le taux SAR rel de l'appareil en cours de fonctionnement peut tre bien infrieur la valeur maximale dfinie, dans la mesure o il fonctionne diffrents niveaux de puissance et utilise uniquement la puissance requise pour atteindre le rseau. Install dans l'ordinateur, cet appareil est conforme aux directives en matire d'exposition aux frquences radio lorsque les antennes se trouvent une distance minimale du corps. Pour transmettre des donnes ou des messages, l'appareil doit disposer d'une connexion de qualit au rseau. Dans certains cas, les transmissions de donnes ou de messages peuvent tre retardes jusqu' ce qu'une connexion soit disponible. Veillez respecter la distance conseille jusqu' la fin de la transmission. Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 27

*Les directives internationales autres que celles de la FCC indiquent que la limite SAR pour les appareils mobiles utiliss par le grand public est de 2 watts/kilogramme (W/kg), calcul sur une moyenne de 10 grammes de masse tissulaire. Ces directives incluent une marge de scurit importante pour une protection accrue du grand public et pour tenir compte des variations dans les mesures. Les valeurs SAR peuvent varier selon les exigences locales en matire de reporting et selon la bande du rseau. Cet quipement intgre un appareil de transmission et rception radiolectrique. Lors d'une utilisation standard, l'observation d'une distance de sparation de 20 cm permet aux niveaux d'exposition des frquences radio de respecter la conformit des normes australiennes et no-zlandaises. Dclaration relative au rseau tlphonique europen (modem/fax) Le produit ci-joint est conforme aux spcifications de la directive 1999/5/CE (annexe II) sur les quipements hertziens et quipements terminaux de tlcommunications et porte en consquence la marque CE. Cependant, des diffrences existant entre les rseaux tlphoniques publics commuts

(RTPC) nationaux prsents dans les diffrents pays/rgions, cette homologation en elle-mme ne garantit pas la russite de toutes les oprations sur tous les points de terminaison du RTPC. En cas de problme, prenez contact avec le fournisseur auprs duquel vous vous tes procur votre quipement. L'quipement a t conu pour fonctionner avec les rseaux DTMF analogiques. Cet quipement peut connatre des difficults d'interconnexion sur les rseaux RTPC prenant uniquement en charge la composition impulsions. Contactez votre oprateur rseau pour bnficier d'une aide supplmentaire. Avis sur l'ergonomie Allemagne (texte en franais) Un systme informatique compos de produits de marque HP est conforme aux exigences allemandes en matire d'ergonomie si tous les produits utiliss portent la marque d'homologation GS , par exemple l'ordinateur de bureau, le clavier, la souris et le moniteur. Allemagne (texte en allemand) Ein aus HP Produkten bestehendes Computersystem erfllt die anwendbaren ergonomischen Anforderungen, wenn alle verwendeten Komponenten das GS Zeichen tragen, wie z. B. Business Desktop PC, Tastatur, PC-Maus und Bildschirm. Avis pour le Japon B VCCI-B 28 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Marques de certification des priphriques WLAN et Bluetooth If this device contains radio equipment, it is certified radio equipment. Avis pour la Core du Sud Avis de compatibilit lectromagntique 29 Avis pour le Mexique Declaracin para Mxico La operacin de este equipo est sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operacin no deseada. Si su producto se brinda con accesorios inalmbricos como un teclado o un mouse y necesita identificar el modelo del accesorio, consulte la etiqueta incluida en ese accesorio. Avis pour Tawan 30 Chapitre 2 Avis de rglementation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de blessures graves, lisez le manuel Scurit et ergonomie du poste de travail. Il dcrit l'installation du poste de travail, la posture ainsi que les conditions de scurit et de travail appropries pour les utilisateurs, et fournit des informations importantes sur la scurit lectrique et mcanique. Vous trouverez ce manuel sur le Web l'adresse http://www.hp.com/ergo, ainsi que sur le CD de documentation qui accompagne le produit. Notice d'avertissement relative la chaleur AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour viter tout risque de blessure associe la chaleur ou de surchauffe de l'ordinateur, ne placez pas ce dernier sur vos genoux et n'obstruez pas ses ouvertures d'aration. Utilisez toujours l'ordinateur sur une surface plane et rigide. La ventilation ne doit pas tre entrave par des lments rigides, tels qu'une imprimante, ni par des lments souples, tels que des coussins, du tissu ou un tapis pais. De mme, l'adaptateur secteur ne doit rester en contact ni avec la peau ni avec un lment souple, tel que des coussins, un vtement ou un tapis lorsque l'ordinateur est en cours de fonctionnement. L'ordinateur et l'adaptateur secteur sont conformes aux limites de temprature de surface accessible l'utilisateur, dfinies par la norme internationale sur la scurit du matriel informatique (CEI/EN 60950). Avis sur les risques lis la scurit Si vous observez l'une des situations suivantes (ou avez d'autres inquitudes en matire de scurit), n'utilisez pas l'ordinateur : bruit de crpitement, de sifflement ou de claquement ou forte odeur/fume en provenance de l'ordinateur. La survenue de l'une de ces situations est normale en cas de dfaillance d'un composant lectronique interne de manire neutralise et contrle. Cependant, ces situations peuvent galement indiquer un risque de scurit. Ne partez pas du principe qu'il s'agit d'une dfaillance neutralise. Mettez l'ordinateur hors tension, dconnectez-le de sa source d'alimentation, puis contactez le support technique. Notice d'avertissement relative la chaleur 31 Avis sur les batteries remplaables par l'utilisateur AVERTISSEMENT !

batterie d'un type incorrect. liminez les batteries usages en respectant les instructions. Il existe un risque d'explosion en cas de remplacement de la batterie par une AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire le risque d'incendie ou de brlures, abstenez-vous de dmonter, d'craser, de perforer, de jeter dans l'eau ou dans le feu une batterie, ou encore de court-circuiter ses connecteurs externes. AVERTISSEMENT ! Ne laissez pas les batteries la porte des enfants. AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour limiter les risques lis la scurit, n'utilisez que la batterie fournie avec l'ordinateur, une batterie de remplacement fournie par HP ou une batterie compatible achete comme accessoire auprs de HP. Avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs AVERTISSEMENT ! L'coute prolonge de musique un volume lev peut endommager votre acuit auditive. Pour rduire le risque de diminution de l'acuit auditive, baissez le volume un niveau modr et agrable et minimisez le temps d'coute des volumes levs. Pour votre scurit, rinitialisez toujours le volume avant d'utiliser un casque ou des couteurs. Le volume sonore de certains de ces appareils peut tre plus lev que d'autres, mme si le rglage est identique. Toute modification des paramtres audio ou d'galisation par dfaut peut entraner une augmentation du volume et doit tre effectue avec prcaution. Pour votre scurit, utilisez uniquement des casques ou des couteurs respectant les limites dfinies par la norme EN 50332-2. Si l'ordinateur comporte un casque ou des couteurs, cette combinaison respecte la norme EN 50332-1. 32 Chapitre 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques d'lectrocution ou de dtrioration du matriel :

Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise secteur facilement accessible. Coupez l'alimentation de l'ordinateur en dbranchant le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur

(plutt que de l'ordinateur). Si l'ordinateur portable est fourni avec une fiche tripolaire, branchez le cordon sur une prise lectrique tripolaire relie la terre. Ne dsactivez pas la broche de mise la terre du cordon d'alimentation en utilisant, par exemple, un adaptateur bipolaire. La broche de mise la terre constitue un lment de scurit essentiel. AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour limiter les problmes de scurit potentiels, n'utilisez avec cet ordinateur que l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec l'ordinateur, un adaptateur secteur de remplacement fourni par HP ou un adaptateur secteur achet comme accessoire auprs de HP. Nettoyage du clavier AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques d'lectrocution ou de dtrioration des composants internes, n'utilisez pas d'aspirateur pour nettoyer le clavier. Un aspirateur peut dposer de la poussire sur la surface du clavier. Nettoyez rgulirement le clavier pour viter que les touches ne deviennent collantes et pour liminer la poussire, les peluches et les particules qui risquent de se loger sous les touches. Utilisez une bombe dpoussirante air comprim avec embout directionnel permettant d'insuffler de l'air sous le clavier et autour des touches pour retirer les particules. Avis sur les dplacements AVERTISSEMENT ! Afin de rduire le risque de choc lectrique, d'incendie ou de dtrioration du matriel, n'essayez pas d'alimenter l'ordinateur au moyen d'un kit de conversion de tension destin aux quipements mnagers. Avis sur les cordons d'alimentation 33 Avis de scurit pour la Chine Chine : avis sur l'altitude Avis sur l'altitude pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie au-del de 5 000 m d'altitude 2000m ou 2000 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales Avis pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie dans des conditions tropicales Norvge et Sude : notice de mise la terre des cbles pour les produits quips d'un tuner TV ATTENTION : Pour limiter les risques lis la scurit, utilisez un isolant voltaque lors de la connexion un systme de distribution par cble. 34 Chapitre 3 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs portables 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Informations importantes relatives la scurit AVERTISSEMENT ! Pour rduire les risques de blessures graves, lisez le manuel Scurit et ergonomie du poste de travail. Il dcrit l'installation du poste de travail, la posture ainsi que les conditions de scurit et de travail appropries pour les utilisateurs, et fournit des informations importantes sur la scurit lectrique et mcanique. Vous trouverez ce manuel sur le Web l'adresse http://www.hp.com/ergo, ainsi que sur le CD de documentation qui accompagne le produit. Afin d'viter tout risque de choc lectrique ou de dommages votre quipement :

Ne dsactivez pas la prise de mise la terre du cordon d'alimentation. La prise de mise la terre constitue un lment de scurit essentiel. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise mise la terre facilement accessible. Coupez l'alimentation du client lger en dbranchant le cordon d'alimentation de la prise secteur. L'ordinateur peut tre trs lourd ; assurez-vous d'adopter une position ergonomique adquate lors de sa manipulation. Installez l'ordinateur proximit d'une prise secteur. Le cordon d'alimentation secteur constitue le principal dispositif de dconnexion secteur de votre ordinateur et doit donc tre facilement accessible. Pour votre scurit, le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec votre ordinateur est quip d'une broche de mise la terre. Utilisez toujours le cordon d'alimentation avec une prise murale correctement relie la terre, afin de rduire les risques d'lectrocution. Pour rduire les risques de choc lectrique en provenance du rseau tlphonique, branchez votre ordinateur dans une prise secteur avant de le connecter une ligne tlphonique. Par ailleurs, dconnectez votre ligne tlphonique avant de dbrancher votre ordinateur de la prise secteur. Dbranchez le cordon du modem du rseau tlphonique avant d'installer ou d'enlever le capot de votre ordinateur. N'utilisez pas l'ordinateur lorsque le capot est enlev. Pour plus de scurit, dbranchez toujours l'ordinateur de sa source d'alimentation, de tout systme de tlcommunications (comme les lignes tlphoniques), des rseaux et des modems avant d'excuter toute opration de maintenance. Si vous ne respectez pas ces consignes, vous risquez de vous blesser ou de causer des dommages matriels. Le modem et l'alimentation de ce produit renferment des niveaux de tension dangereux. Informations importantes relatives la scurit 35 ATTENTION : Si votre ordinateur est quip d'un commutateur de slection de tension destin aux systmes fonctionnant sous 115 ou 230 V, ce commutateur a t prdfini sur la tension en vigueur dans le pays/rgion o il a t vendu initialement. Mettre le commutateur sur la mauvaise position peut endommager l'ordinateur et annuler toute garantie implicite. Ce produit n'a pas t valu pour une connexion un systme d'alimentation informatique (un systme de distribution de courant alternatif sans connexion directe la terre, selon la norme CEI/EN 60950). Conditions d'installation Consultez les instructions d'installation avant de brancher cet quipement l'alimentation. AVERTISSEMENT ! L'quipement doit tre pourvu d'un raccordement la terre protecteur secteur appropri. Cet ordinateur peut contenir des pices sous tension et amovibles. Dbranchez le cordon d'alimentation avant de retirer le botier. Remettez le botier bien en place avant de remettre l'ordinateur sous tension. Avis sur le remplacement de la batterie AVERTISSEMENT ! Le produit peut contenir une pile ou un module de batterie interne alcalin, au dioxyde de lithium manganse ou au pentoxyde de vanadium. Il y a danger d'incendie et de brlures s'il n'est pas manipul correctement. Pour rduire les risques de blessure :

N'essayez pas de recharger la batterie. vitez de la soumettre des tempratures suprieures 60 C (140 F). N'essayez pas de dmonter, d'craser, de percer la batterie, ni de court-circuiter ses bornes ou de la jeter dans le feu ou l'eau. Il existe un risque d'explosion en cas de remplacement de la batterie par une batterie d'un type incorrect. liminez les batteries usages en respectant les instructions. Remplacez uniquement par une batterie HP prvue pour ce produit. Pour plus d'informations sur le retrait d'une batterie, reportez-vous la documentation de l'ordinateur. Les piles, modules de batterie et accumulateurs ne doivent pas tre jets avec les ordures mnagres. Pour permettre leur recyclage ou leur mise au rebut, veuillez utiliser les systmes de collecte publique ou renvoyez-les HP, un partenaire HP agr ou leurs agents. Taiwan EPA demande aux fabricants ou aux importateurs de piles, conformment l'Article 15 de la loi relative la mise au rebut (Waste Disposal Act), d'indiquer les mentions de rcupration des piles usages dans des points de vente, brochures ou publicits. Contactez une entreprise de recyclage qualifie pour la mise au rebut approprie de la pile. 36 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis sur le volume des casques et des couteurs AVERTISSEMENT ! L'coute prolonge de musique un volume lev peut endommager votre acuit auditive. Pour rduire le risque de diminution de l'acuit auditive, baissez le volume un niveau modr et agrable et minimisez le temps d'coute des volumes levs. Pour votre scurit, rinitialisez toujours le volume avant d'utiliser un casque ou des couteurs. Le volume sonore de certains de ces appareils peut tre plus lev que d'autres, mme si le rglage est identique. Toute modification des paramtres audio ou d'galisation par dfaut peut entraner une augmentation du volume et doit tre effectue avec prcaution. Si l'ordinateur est quip d'un casque d'coute ou d'couteurs et qu'il porte le sigle GS , cette combinaison est en conformit avec la norme EN 50332-1. Pour votre propre scurit, les casques d'coute ou les couteurs utiliss avec ces produits doivent tre en conformit avec les limitations des casques de la norme EN 50332-2. Informations de scurit relatives au laser Pour les produits quips d'units optiques ou d'metteurs fibre optique. Ce produit peut tre quip d'un priphrique de stockage optique (c'est--dire un lecteur CD ou DVD) et/ou d'un metteur-rcepteur fibre optique. Ces lments comportent des lasers classs dans la catgorie des produits laser de classe 1, conformment la norme IEC/EN 60825-1, et sont conformes ses exigences. Chacun de ces produits laser est conforme aux rgulations 21 CFR 1040.10 et 1040.11 de la US FDA ou est conforme ces normes l'exception des diffrences conformment la notice des lasers No. 50, du 24 Juin 2007. AVERTISSEMENT ! L'utilisation de mthodes de contrle ou de rglage ou de procdures, autres que celles indiques dans ce document ou dans le manuel d'installation des appareils rayon laser, peut exposer l'utilisateur des radiations dangereuses. Pour rduire le risque d'exposition un rayonnement dangereux :

N'essayez pas d'ouvrir le botier du module. Il ne contient pas de pice rparable par l'utilisateur. N'effectuez pas de commandes, de rglages ou d'oprations sur l'appareil laser, autres que ceux indiqus dans le prsent manuel. Seuls les techniciens agrs HP sont autoriss rparer l'unit. Exigences relatives au bloc d'alimentation et au cordon d'alimentation Exigences relatives la mise la terre des alimentations de classe 1 Pour tre protg contre les courants de dfaut, l'quipement doit tre raccord une borne de terre. Branchez le cordon d'alimentation sur une prise secteur disposant d'une mise la terre raccorde la terre. Les cordons d'alimentation de remplacement ne fournissent pas une protection adquate contre les dfauts. Utilisez exclusivement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec ce produit ou un cordon de remplacement agr par Hewlett-Packard. Avis sur le volume des casques et des couteurs 37 Danemark For tilslutning af de vrige ledere, se medflgende installationsvejledning. Finlande Laite on liitettv suojamaadoituskoskettimilla varustettuun pistorasiaan. Norvge Apparatet m kun tilkoples jordet stikkontakt. Sude Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag, nr den ansluts till ett ntverk. Exigences relatives l'alimentation Les alimentations sur certains produits sont quipes de commutateurs de tension externes. La fonction de slection de tension sur le produit autorise son fonctionnement sous toute tension comprise entre 100-127 ou 200-240 volts secteur. Les alimentations sur les produits dpourvus de commutateurs de tension externes sont quipes de circuits internes qui dtectent la tension d'entre et basculent automatiquement sur la tension approprie. Pour des raisons de scurit, n'utilisez que l'adaptateur secteur fourni avec l'quipement ou un adaptateur de remplacement autoris par Hewlett-Packard. Les rfrences de remplacement sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/hpsupport/index.pl. Pour une utilisation en Norvge Ce produit est galement conu pour un systme lectrique informatique avec tension phase-phase de 230 V. 38 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Cordons d'alimentation requis Le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec le produit est conforme aux rglementations en vigueur dans le pays o le matriel a t achet l'origine. N'utilisez que le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec l'quipement ou un cordon d'alimentation de remplacement de Hewlett-Packard ou d'une source HP agre. Les rfrences de remplacement sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/cgi-bin/

hpsupport/index.pl. Les cordons d'alimentation destins tre utiliss dans d'autres pays doivent respecter les normes du pays o vous utilisez le produit. Pour plus d'informations sur les exigences de cordon d'alimentation, contactez votre revendeur, votre mainteneur ou votre fournisseur de services agr HP. AVERTISSEMENT ! N'utilisez pas de cordons d'alimentation d'autres produits. Un mauvais cordon d'alimentation peut entraner un risque de dcharge lectrique ou d'incendie. Les exigences prsentes ci-aprs s'appliquent tous les pays. 1. 2. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre homologu par une agence accrdite, responsable de l'valuation dans le pays o le cordon sera install. La longueur du cordon doit tre comprise entre 1,8 m (6 pieds) and 3,6 m (12 pieds). Pour un cordon d'alimentation de 2 m (6,56 pieds) ou moins, le diamtre du cordon doit tre d'au minimum 0,75 mm2 ou 18 AWG. Si le cordon d'alimentation dpasse 2 m (6,56 pieds), le diamtre du cordon doit tre d'au minimum 1 mm2 ou 16 AWG. Le cordon d'alimentation doit tre branch un endroit dgag o il ne risque pas d'tre pitin ou coinc par des objets. Accordez une attention particulire la fiche, la prise murale et l'endroit o le cordon sort du botier de l'appareil. AVERTISSEMENT ! N'utilisez pas ce produit avec un cordon d'alimentation endommag. Si le cordon d'alimentation est endommag de quelque manire que ce soit, remplacez-le immdiatement. Un cordon endommag peut entraner des risques de blessure. Spcifications du cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon Pour une utilisation au Japon, utilisez uniquement le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec l'appareil. ATTENTION : N'utilisez pas le cordon d'alimentation fourni avec ce produit pour alimenter d'autres appareils. Risque de pincement AVERTISSEMENT ! Observez les zones risque de pincement. N'approchez pas vos doigts des pices se refermant. Risque de pincement 39 Avis de scurit pour la Chine Chine : avis sur l'altitude Avis sur l'altitude pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie au-del de 5 000 m d'altitude 2000m ou 2000 Chine : avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales Avis pour les produits dont l'utilisation n'est pas certifie dans des conditions tropicales 40 Chapitre 4 Avis de scurit pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne Le niveau de pression acoustique (LpA) est nettement en dessous de 70 dB(A) (position oprateur, fonctionnement normal, selon ISO 7779). Les donnes d'mission de bruit acoustique sont disponibles dans les dclarations IT ECO relatives au produit, l'adresse : http://www.hp.com/go/ted Schalldruckpegel (LpA) ist weit unterhalb 70 dB(A) (Benutzerposition, normaler Betrieb, nach ISO 7779) Die Schallemissionswerte der Produkte knnen in den produktbezogenen IT ECO Declarations auf folgender Internet Adresse gefunden werden: http://www.hp.com/go/ted Avis d'acoustique pour l'Allemagne 41 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables Ce chapitre prsente des avis relatifs l'environnement des diffrents pays ou rgions et des informations de conformit. Certains de ces avis ne s'appliquent peut-tre pas votre produit. Recyclage du matriel lectronique et de la batterie HP encourage ses clients recycler l'quipement lectronique usag, les cartouches d'impression HP d'origine et les batteries rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site Web HP : http://www.hp.com/recycle. Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs Ce symbole indique que vous ne devez pas jeter votre produit avec les dchets mnagers. Il est de votre responsabilit de protger la sant et l'environnement et d'liminer votre quipement en le remettant une dchetterie effectuant le recyclage des quipements lectriques et lectroniques. Pour plus d'informations, prenez contact avec votre service d'limination des ordures mnagres ou ouvrez la page http://www.hp.com/recycle. Substances chimiques HP s'engage fournir ses clients des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ses produits conformment aux dispositions lgales telles que REACH (rglement CE numro 1907/2006 du Parlement europen et du Conseil). Un rapport d'informations sur la conformit des substances chimiques de ce produit est disponible l'adresse : http://www.hp.com/go/reach. 42 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/chinasepa.html http://www.hp.com.cn/hardwarerecycle

( http://www. sepa.gov.cn) Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) Tableau des substances/composants toxiques et dangereux et leur contenu conformment aux mthodes de gestion du contrle de la pollution par les produits d'informations lectroniques de Chine Substances et composants toxiques et dangereux Nom de la pice Plomb

(Pb) Mercure

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Batterie Cbles Camra Chssis/Autre Lecteur de carte mmoire flash Lecteur de disquette Disque dur Casque Cartes PCA d'entre/

sortie Clavier cran LCD X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chrome hexavalent

(Cr(VI)) Diphnyles polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Avis sur l'environnement pour la Chine 43 Substances et composants toxiques et dangereux Nom de la pice Support (CD/DVD/

disquette) Mmoire Carte mre, processeur, dissipateurs thermiques Souris Unit de disque optique Priphrique d'amarrage en option Adaptateur d'alimentation Source d'alimentation Tlcommande Lecteur de carte Smart Card/Java Haut-parleurs externes Tuner TV Unit mmoire flash USB Concentrateur USB Webcam Rcepteur sans fil Cartes sans fil Plomb

(Pb) Mercure

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Chrome hexavalent

(Cr(VI)) Diphnyles polybroms (PBB) thers diphnyles polybroms

(PBDE) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O : Indique que la quantit de substance toxique ou dangereuse contenue dans tous les matriaux homognes de cette pice se situe en dessous de la limite fixe par la norme SJ/T11363-2006. X : Indique que cette substance toxique ou dangereuse contenue dans au moins un matriel homogne utilis dans ce composant est au-dessus de la limite dans SJ/T11363-2006. Tous les lments du tableau accompagns d'un X sont conformes la directive europenne 2002/95/EC du 27 janvier 2003, dite RoHS (Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'environnement relative aux dchets d'quipements lectriques et lectroniques) et ses amendements. REMARQUE : La dure d'utilisation cologique en anne, en rfrence, a t dtermine sur la base de conditions normales d'utilisation du produit, telles que la temprature et l'humidit. 44 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables

/

I/O PCA

(LCD) CD/DVD/

/Java USB USB

(Pb)

(Hg)

(Cd)

(Cr(VI))

(PBB) (PBDE) X X X X X X X X X X X O X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O SJ/T11363-2006 X SJ/T11363-2006 X RoHS 2003 1 27 2002/95/EC

:

Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) 45 Dclaration de contenu de l'quipement pour le Japon Une norme japonaise, dfinie par la spcification JIS C 0950, 2008, oblige les fabricants fournir des dclarations de contenu de matriel pour certaines catgories de produits lectroniques proposes la vente aprs le 1 juillet 2006. Pour afficher la dclaration de matriel JIS C 0950 de ce produit, rendez-vous sur le site Web HP : http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie Ce produit a t tiquet conformment la loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie exigeant la divulgation de la consommation nergtique en utilisation normale (mode inactif) et en mode veille. Votre produit correspond l'une des nombreuses configurations de cette famille de modle ; la consommation nergtique du mode inactif de votre configuration spcifique peut tre diffrente des informations figurant sur l'tiquette. La consommation nergtique relle de votre produit peut tre suprieure ou infrieure la valeur signale sur l'tiquette de l'nergie du produit au Mexique en raison de facteurs tels que la configuration (composants et modules choisis) et de l'utilisation (tches ralises, logiciels installs et excuts, etc.). Rglementation EEE de la Turquie En conformit avec la rglementation EEE EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur Restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine L'quipement est conforme aux exigences relatives aux rglementations techniques, approuves par la rsolution du Cabinet des ministres de l'Ukraine date du 3 dcembre 2008 1057, en termes de restrictions quant l'utilisation de certaines substances dangereuses dans les quipements lectroniques et lectriques.

, 3 2008 1057. Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire Voir http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. La batterie de l'horloge en temps rel ou la pile bouton de ce produit est susceptible de contenir du perchlorate et peut ncessiter une manipulation particulire lors de son recyclage ou de sa mise au rebut en Californie. 46 Chapitre 5 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs portables 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Recyclage du matriel lectronique et des batteries Hewlett-Packard encourage ses clients recycler le matriel lectronique usag, les cartouches d'impression de marque HP et les batteries rechargeables. Pour plus d'informations sur les programmes de recyclage, consultez le site http://www.hp.com/recycle. Pour obtenir des informations concernant le recyclage du produit au Japon, reportez-vous http://www.hp.com/jp/hardwarerecycle/. Mise au rebut des quipements par les utilisateurs Ce symbole indique que vous ne devez pas jeter votre produit avec les dchets mnagers. Il est de votre responsabilit de protger la sant et l'environnement et d'liminer votre quipement en le remettant une dchetterie effectuant le recyclage des quipements lectriques et lectroniques. Pour plus d'informations, prenez contact avec votre service d'limination des ordures mnagres ou ouvrez la page http://www.hp.com/recycle. Conformit ENERGY STAR (certains modles) REMARQUE : Cette section s'applique uniquement aux produits portant le logo Energy Star. En tant que partenaire ENERGY STAR, Hewlett-Packard Company a suivi pour le produit le processus de qualification et de certification renforc labor de l'agence amricaine pour la protection de l'environnement afin de s'assurer que les produits portant le logo ENERGY STAR sont agrs ENERGY STAR conformment aux lignes directrices d'ENERGY STAR en matire d'utilisation efficace de l'nergie. Le logo suivant est prsent sur tous les ordinateurs qualifis ENERGY STAR. Recyclage du matriel lectronique et des batteries 47 Le programme ENERGY STAR pour ordinateurs a t cr par l'EPA pour promouvoir l'conomie d'nergie et rduire la pollution de l'air grce des quipements plus conergtiques au sein des maisons, bureaux et usines. Une des faons de rendre les produits plus efficaces sur le plan nergtique consiste rduire la consommation lorsqu'elle n'est pas gre par la fonction Gestion de l'alimentation de Microsoft Windows. La fonction de gestion de l'alimentation permet la mise en veille de l'ordinateur aprs une priode d'inactivit de l'utilisateur. Lorsqu'elle est utilise avec un moniteur ENERGY STAR, cette fonction prend galement en charge les fonctions similaires de gestion de l'alimentation du moniteur externe. Afin de bnficier de cette conomie d'nergie, la fonction de gestion de l'alimentation a t prdfinie pour une mise en veille de l'ordinateur et du moniteur aprs une certaine priode d'inactivit :

Ordinateur Moniteur/cran intgr Ordinateurs de bureau et postes de travail Aprs 30 minutes Aprs 15 minutes Clients lgers et ordinateurs de bureau Sans objet Aprs 15 minutes Il suffit que l'utilisateur se serve d'un des priphriques d'entre de l'ordinateur (ex. : souris, clavier, etc.) pour que l'ordinateur et l'cran quittent le mode veille et se rallument. Lorsque la fonction Wake On LAN d'veil par appel rseau est active, il est galement possible de rallumer l'ordinateur l'aide d'un signal rseau. Pour plus d'informations sur le potentiel d'conomie nergtique et financire de la fonction Gestion de l'alimentation, reportez-vous au site Web consacr la gestion de l'alimentation ENERGY STAR de l'EPA : http://www.energystar.gov/powermanagement. Pour plus d'informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR et ses bienfaits sur l'environnement, reportez-vous au site Web ENERGY STAR de l'EPA : http://www.energystar.gov. ATTENTION : L'utilisation de la fonction d'conomie d'nergie du moniteur avec des moniteurs qui ne sont pas qualifis ENERGY STAR peut entraner une distorsion de l'image en cas de fermeture automatique pour conomie d'nergie. REMARQUE : ENERGY STAR n'est pas pris en charge sur les ordinateurs de bureau et les postes de travail configurs avec certaines versions de Linux ou FreeDOS. En cas de restauration du systme d'exploitation, vous devrez galement redfinir les paramtres ENERGY STAR (le cas chant) une fois la restauration effectue. Sous Windows 7, pour contrler les paramtres d'alimentation par dfaut de votre ordinateur de bureau ou station de travail, slectionnez Dmarrer > Panneau de configuration, puis tapez Options d'alimentation dans la fentre de recherche. 48 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Sous Windows 8, pour contrler les paramtres d'alimentation par dfaut de votre ordinateur de bureau ou station de travail, tapez alimentation dans l'cran d'accueil, slectionnez Paramtres, puis slectionnez Options d'alimentation dans la liste des applications. Substances chimiques HP s'engage fournir ses clients des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ses produits, conformment aux normes juridiques en vigueur telles que le rglement concernant l'enregistrement, l'valuation et l'autorisation des substances chimiques, ainsi que les restrictions applicables ces substances (REACH, rglement CE N 1907/2006 du Parlement europen et du Conseil). Des informations sur les substances chimiques contenues dans ce produit sont disponibles l'adresse http://www.hp.com/go/reach. Avis sur le mercure Ce produit HP peut contenir les matriaux suivants qui requirent un traitement spcial la fin de leur cycle de vie :

Le mercure contenu dans la lampe fluorescente de l'cran cristaux liquides (LCD) Il se peut que l'limination du mercure soit rglemente en raison de considrations environnementales. Pour obtenir des informations sur l'limination et le traitement de cette substance, veuillez contacter les autorits locales concernes ou l'Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA)

(http://www.eiae.org). Matriau compos de perchlorate : une manipulation particulire peut tre ncessaire La batterie de l'horloge en temps rel est susceptible de contenir du perchlorate et peut ncessiter une manipulation particulire lors de son recyclage ou de sa mise au rebut en Californie. Reportez-

vous au site http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/. Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour la Chine (RoHS) Substances chimiques 49

(cid:7481)(cid:8706)(cid:7481)(cid:4579)(cid:10393)(cid:17240)(cid:2748)(cid:1907)(cid:13136)(cid:2554)(cid:1958)(cid:2651)(cid:18431)(cid:16024)

(cid:7785)(cid:6558)(cid:1117)(cid:3373)(cid:11444)(cid:457)(cid:11109)(cid:4480)(cid:1553)(cid:5791)(cid:1239)(cid:2801)(cid:8849)(cid:7683)(cid:6615)(cid:2150)(cid:12753)(cid:10806)(cid:2254)(cid:8965)(cid:458)

(cid:1137)(cid:7605)(cid:3)(cid:3898)(cid:10812)(cid:3230)(cid:2754)

(cid:7065)(cid:10019)(cid:3230)

(cid:1979)(cid:4494)(cid:7575) I/O PCAs

(cid:11115)(cid:9414)

(cid:19300)(cid:11534)

(cid:21846)(cid:7741)

(cid:7536)(cid:12775)(cid:18)(cid:1964)(cid:1292)

(cid:20228)(cid:6269)

(cid:1979)(cid:18206)(cid:18)(cid:3916)(cid:18206)(cid:4296)(cid:1417)

(cid:19515)(cid:16945)(cid:16884)(cid:3901)

(cid:3916)(cid:18206)(cid:6621)(cid:2156)(cid:16884)(cid:3901)

(cid:11115)(cid:13628)

(cid:11938)(cid:11534)(cid:20647)(cid:2270)(cid:3230)

(cid:7284)(cid:12144)(cid:4741) O: (cid:16030)(cid:12144)(cid:16923)(cid:7487)(cid:8712)(cid:7487)(cid:4585)(cid:10399)(cid:17246)(cid:3422)(cid:16923)(cid:18206)(cid:1324)(cid:6262)(cid:7487)(cid:3453)(cid:17246)(cid:7558)(cid:7119)(cid:1123)(cid:11450)(cid:2657)(cid:18437)(cid:3453)(cid:3422)SJ/T11363-2006(cid:3)

(cid:7741)(cid:2044)(cid:16378)(cid:4560)(cid:11450)(cid:19590)(cid:18437)(cid:16311)(cid:8824)(cid:1307)(cid:1089)(cid:574) X: (cid:16030)(cid:12144)(cid:16923)(cid:7487)(cid:8712)(cid:7487)(cid:4585)(cid:10399)(cid:17246)(cid:14377)(cid:4679)(cid:3422)(cid:16923)(cid:18206)(cid:1324)(cid:11450)(cid:7686)(cid:1078)(cid:3453)(cid:17246)(cid:7558)(cid:7119)(cid:1123)(cid:11450)(cid:2657)(cid:18437)(cid:17339)(cid:2096) SJ/T11363-2006(cid:3)(cid:7741)(cid:2044)(cid:16378)(cid:4560)(cid:11450)(cid:19590)(cid:18437)(cid:16311)(cid:8824)(cid:574)

(cid:16030)(cid:1123)(cid:7741)(cid:7487)(cid:263)X(cid:264)(cid:3)(cid:11450)(cid:6262)(cid:7487)(cid:18206)(cid:1324)(cid:18227)(cid:12636)(cid:2622)(cid:8541)(cid:11541)RoHS(cid:8971)(cid:16378)(cid:15)(cid:263)(cid:8541)(cid:9064)(cid:16868)(cid:1360)(cid:2754)(cid:8541)(cid:11541)(cid:10812)(cid:1217)(cid:1360) 2003(cid:5290)1(cid:7486)27(cid:7195)(cid:1961)(cid:1220)(cid:11115)(cid:4486)(cid:11115)(cid:3230)(cid:16884)(cid:3901)(cid:1123)(cid:19590)(cid:2156)(cid:1461)(cid:11102)(cid:7686)(cid:1233)(cid:7487)(cid:4585)(cid:10399)(cid:17246)(cid:11450)2002/95/EC

(cid:2605)(cid:6461)(cid:1306)(cid:264)(cid:574)

(cid:8990)(cid:966)(cid:10725)(cid:1555)(cid:1461)(cid:11102)(cid:7509)(cid:19590)(cid:11450)(cid:2552)(cid:13881)(cid:7741)(cid:16892)(cid:2572)(cid:2025)(cid:1220)(cid:1245)(cid:2807)(cid:8601)(cid:5230)(cid:5147)(cid:1426)(cid:11450)(cid:9311)(cid:5340)(cid:2754)(cid:9397)(cid:5340)(cid:12671)(cid:7575)(cid:1324)(cid:574) The Table of Toxic and Hazardous Substances/Elements and their Content As required by China's Management Methods for Controlling Pollution by Electronic Information Products 50 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles Tableau 6-1 Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements Part Name Lead

(Pb) Mercury

(Hg) Cadmium

(Cd) Hexavalent Chromium

(Cr(VI)) Polybromi-

nated biphenyls

(PBB) Polybromi-

nated diphenyl ethers (PBDE) Motherboard, processor and heat sink X Memory I/O PCAs Power supply Keyboard Mouse Chassis/Other Fans Internal/External Media Reading Devices External Control Devices Cable Hard Disk Drive Display X X X X X X X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in all of the homogeneous materials for this part is below the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. X: Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials used for this part is above the limit requirement in SJ/T11363-2006. All parts named in this table with an X are in compliance with the European Union's RoHS Legislation Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. REMARQUE : The referenced Environmental Protection Use Period Marking was determined according to normal operating use conditions of the product such as temperature and humidity. Dclarations IT ECO Ordinateurs de bureau et clients lgers http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecodesktop-pc.html?

jumpid=reg_R1002_USEN Stations de travail http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdata/itecoworkstatio.html Dclarations IT ECO 51 Avis sur la restriction des substances dangereuses pour le Japon (RoHS) 2008 JISC0950 2006 7 http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950 A Japanese regulatory requirement, defined by specification JIS C 0950, 2008, mandates that manufacturers provide Material Content Declarations for certain categories of electronic products offered for sale after July 1, 2006. To view the JIS C 0950 material declaration for this product, visit http://www.hp.com/go/jisc0950. Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico (loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie) Se ha etiquetado este producto en conformidad con la Ley para el Aprovechamiento Sustentable de la Energa de Mxico, que requiere la divulgacin del consumo de energa del modo de uso normal

(modo inactivo) y del modo de espera. Su producto es una de las muchas configuraciones de esta familia de modelos; el consumo de energa del modo inactivo de su configuracin especfica puede diferir de la informacin de la etiqueta. El consumo real de energa de su producto puede ser mayor o menor que el valor informado en la etiqueta de energa de producto para Mxico a causa de factores como la configuracin (componentes y mdulos seleccionados) y el uso (tareas que se estn efectuando, software instalado y en ejecucin, etc.). REMARQUE : Esta ley no es aplicable a los workstations. This product has been labeled in compliance with the Mexico Sustainable Energy Use Law requiring disclosure of power consumption in the normal use (idle mode) and standby modes. Your product is one of many configurations in this model family; the idle mode power consumption of your specific configuration may vary from the information on the label. Actual power consumption of your product may be higher or lower than the value reported on the Mexico product energy label due to factors such as configuration (components and modules chosen) and usage (tasks being performed, software installed and running, etc.). REMARQUE : Workstations are not labeled because the law is not applicable to the workstation product category. Rglementation EEE de la Turquie Trkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur 52 Chapitre 6 Avis sur les conditions d'utilisation pour les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail personnelles

(restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine)

, 3 2008 1057. The equipment complies with requirements of the Technical Regulation, approved by the Resolution of Cabinet of Ministry of Ukraine as of December 3, 2008 1057, in terms of restrictions for the use of certain dangerous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.

(restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine) 53 Index A avis utilisation en vol 12 voyage 33 avis sur la mise au rebut des quipements 42 avis, ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail avis sur la scurit des lasers 13 avis sur le niveau du volume, FCC (Federal Communications casque et couteurs 32 avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN de Thalande 11 batterie 12, 46 batterie, remplacement par l'utilisateur 32 Brsil 5 Canada 5 clavier 33 cordon d'alimentation pour le Japon 18 cordons d'alimentation 18, 33 Core du Sud 10 environnement 42 ergonomie 8, 28 Japon 9 Macrovision Corporation 19 matriau compos de perchlorate 46 Mexique 10 mise au rebut des quipements 42 modem 14 niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs 32 restriction d'utilisation de Commission) 24 avis, ordinateurs portables FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 3 avis, restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour la Chine 43, 49 avis, restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour le Japon 52 avis de certification GS 8, 28 avis de restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 46 avis pour l'Union europenne 6, 26 avis pour la Core du Sud 10 avis pour le Brsil 5 avis pour le Canada 5 avis pour le Japon 9 avis pour Macrovision Corporation 19 substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 46 avis relatif au clavier 33 avis relatif aux appareils sans fil restriction d'utilisation de pour le Mexique 10 substances dangereuses pour la Chine 43, 49 avis sur l'altitude 34, 40 avis sur l'environnement pour la restriction d'utilisation de Chine 43 substances dangereuses pour le Japon 52 avis sur l'ergonomie 8, 28 avis sur la mise au rebut scurit des lasers 13 Singapour 11 Tawan 11 Union europenne 6, 26 batterie 46 batterie, remplacement par l'utilisateur 12 quipement 42 avis sur le niveau du volume du casque et des couteurs 32 avis sur les appareils sans fil pour Singapour 11 avis sur les appareils sans fil WWAN de Thalande 11 avis sur les conditions d'utilisation 42 avis sur les cordons d'alimentation 18, 33 avis sur les cordons d'alimentation pour le Japon 18 avis sur les dplacements 33 avis sur les modems 14 Canada 17 Japon 17 Nouvelle-Zlande 17 systme amricain 14 avis sur les modems pour la Nouvelle-Zlande 17 avis sur les modems pour le avis sur les modems pour le Canada 17 Japon 17 avis sur les modems pour les tats-Unis 14 avis sur les utilisations en vol 12 avis sur une utilisation dans des conditions tropicales 34, 40 avis tawanais 11 B batterie, avis 12, 32, 46 54 Index C conformit ENERGY STAR 12 D dclaration de conformit ordinateurs portables 4 dclaration de contenu de l'quipement pour le Japon 46 F FCC (Federal Communications Commission) avis sur les ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 24 avis sur les ordinateurs portables 3 cble des ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 24 cbles pour ordinateurs portables 3 modifications apportes aux ordinateurs portables 3 modifications des ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers et stations de travail 24 L loi du Mexique sur l'utilisation durable de l'nergie 46 M matriel lectronique et de la batterie, recyclage 42 modifications, ordinateurs de bureau, clients lgers, stations de travail FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 24 N notice de mise la terre des cbles 34 notices restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 53 O ordinateurs portables, modifications FCC (Federal Communications Commission) 3 P priphrique matriel, identification 1 priphriques de rseau local sans fil 25 priphriques LAN sans fil 26 priphriques WLAN 4 R recyclage de la batterie 42 recyclage du matriel lectronique et de la batterie 42 restriction d'utilisation de substances dangereuses pour l'Ukraine 53 S support vocal 18 T tuner TV, notice de mise la terre des cbles 34 Index 55

Lenovo regulatory notice for wireless adapters - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This manual contains regulatory information for the following Lenovo products. Lenovo Yoga 2 11 The following wireless modules are supported on Lenovo Yoga 2 11:

BCM943142HM

QCWB335 Rev. AA00

Read first regulatory information Please read this document before you use the Lenovo computer. Lenovo computer complies with the radio frequency and safety standards of any country or region in which it has been approved for wireless use. You must install and use your computer in strict accordance with the instructions as described hereafter. Veuillez lire ce document avant dutiliser lordinateur Lenovo. Lordinateur Lenovo est conforme aux normes de scurit et de radiofrquence du pays ou de la rgion o son utilisation sans fil est agre. Vous devez installer et utiliser votre ordinateur en respectant scrupuleusement les instructions dcrites ci-aprs.

USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) I. Factory preinstalled Wireless LAN module

FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063 (Model: BCM943142HM)

FCC ID: PPD-QCWB335 (Model: QCWB335) Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Cards marketed in the USA and Canada do not support nor function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). i) The FCC RF Exposure compliance:

The radiated output power of the Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Card authorized to use for the your Lenovo computer is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, it shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized as follows:

Note: The transmission diversity function is implemented for this product. For WLAN cards (Model:

BCM943142HM, QCWB335) using Main and Auxiliary antennas for transmission in the IEEE 802.11 b/g/n transmission mode, radio frequency energy is not emitted simultaneously from both Main and Auxiliary antennas. One of the antennas is selected automatically or manually

(by users) to have good quality of radiocommunication (transmission diversity function). For WLAN cards BCM943142HM, QCWB335 in the IEEE 802.11 b/g/n, or MIMO (Multiple In Multiple Out ) transmission mode, the radio frequency energy is emitted from Main antenna. ii) FCC ID of wireless module:

On the bottom side of your Lenovo computer, you will find an indicator label of the format Contains Transmitter Module: FCC ID XXXX, where XXXX represents the FCC ID that corresponds to your preinstalled Wireless LAN module. 1 iii) Radio Frequency interference requirement:

Each device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to FCC Part 15 Subpart B. Refer to Electronic emission notices on page 5. The models BCM94330UARTSDB underwent the certification process with each respective FCC ID number listed in 1. Factory preinstalled Wireless LAN module on page 1. II. Simultaneous use of RF transmitters Please make sure of the following conditions on use of wireless features:

1. When you use any other RF option device, all wireless features in your Lenovo computer are required to be turned off. 2. Users must follow the RF Safety instructions on wireless option devices that are included in the RF option device's user's manual. 2

Canada Industry Canada (IC) IC Certification number I) Factory preinstalled Wireless LAN modules:

IC: 4324A-BRCM1063 (Model: BCM943142HM)

IC: 4104A-QCWB335 (Model: QCWB335) Wireless LAN Mini PCI Express Cards marketed in the USA and Canada do not support nor function in the extended channels (12ch, 13ch). There is no certification number of Industry Canada for Mini PCI Express Card shown on the enclosure of your Lenovo computer. Instead you will find an indicator label pointing to the location of the IC Certification number on the bottom side of your Lenovo computer. This label will be of the format Contains Transmitter Module: Canada IC: XXXX, where XXXX represents the IC ID that corresponds to your preinstalled WLAN module. II) Low power license-exempt radiocommunication devices (RSS-210):

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. The transmitter devices have been designed to operate with the antennas integrated in Lenovo computer, and having a maximum gain of within 3 dBi. III) Exposure of humans to RF fields (RSS-102):

Lenovo computers employ low gain integral antennas that do not emit RF field in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health Canadas Web site at www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb The radiated energy from the antennas connected to the wireless adapters conforms to the IC limit of the RF exposure requirement regarding IC RSS-102, Issue 2 clause 4.2. 3 Numro dhomologation IC I) Modules de rseaux local sans fil pr-install lusine:

IC: 4324A-BRCM1063 (Model: BCM943142HM)

IC: 4104A-QCWB335 (Model: QCWB335) Les cartes de rseau local sans fil Express mini-PCI commercialises aux Etats-Unis et au Canada ne prennent pas en charge les canaux tendus (12ch, 13ch) et ne fonctionnent donc pas sur de tels canaux. Le botier de votre ordinateur Lenovo ne comporte pas de numro dhomologation IC (Industry Canada) pour la carte mini-PCI Express ; mais sous votre Lenovo, vous trouverez une tiquette indicatrice pointant vers lemplacement du numro dhomologation IC. Ltiquette se prsente sous la forme Contains Transmitter Module: Canada IC: XXXX o XXXX reprsente lID IC qui correspond au module WLAN prinstall. II) Remarque relative aux appareils de communication radio de faible puissance sans licence (CNR-210):

Le fonctionnement de ce type dappareil est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. Cet appareil ne doit pas perturber les communications radio, et 2. cet appareil doit supporter toute perturbation, y compris les perturbations qui pourraient provoquer son dysfonctionnement. Les priphriques dmission sont conus pour fonctionner avec des antennes intgres aux Lenovo et ayant un gain maximal de moins de 3 dBi. III) Exposition des tres humains aux champs radiolectriques (RF) (CNR-102):

Lordinateur Lenovo utilise des antennes intgrales faible gain qui nmettent pas un champ lectromagntique suprieur aux normes imposes par le Ministre de la sant canadien pour la population. Consultez le Safety Code 6 sur le site Web du Ministre de la sant canadien ladresse www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb. Lnergie mise par les antennes relies aux adaptateurs sans fil respecte la limite dexposition aux radiofrquences telle que dfinie par Industrie Canada dans la clause 4.2 du document CNR-102. Le gain d'antenne maximal autorispour les appareils dans les bandes de frquence 5250-5350 MHz, 5470-5725 MHz et 5725-5825 MHz est conforme la limite p.i.r.e (puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente) dfinie dans la section A9.2 du CNR-210. Lorsque vous utilisez une carte de rseau local sans fil dans le mode de transmission 802.11 a/n:

Les appareils destins la bande 5150-5250 MHz devront tre exclusivement utillss en intrieur afin de rduire les risques de perturbations lectromagntiques gnantes sur les systmes de satellite mobile dans un mme canal.

Les radars forte puissance sont dsigns comme les utilisateurs principaux (c'est--dire qu'ils sont prioritaires) des bandes 5250-5350 MHz et. 5650-5850 MHz. lls peuvent provoquer des perturbations lectromagntiques sur les appareils de type LELAN (rseau de communication local sans licence) ou les endommager. 4

Electronic emission notices Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement

BCM943142HM

QCWB335 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible Party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 Telephone: 1-919-294-5900 Industry Canada Class B Emission Compliance Statement This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Avis de conformit la rglementation dIndustrie Canada Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. This device has been tested and meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR value reported is 1.15w/kg. 5 Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 1 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM P/N: XXXXXXXXXX Rev. AA00 Lenovo limited warranty L505-0010-02 08/2011 This Lenovo Limited Warranty consists of the following parts:

Part 1 - General Terms Part 2 - Country-specific Terms Part 3 - Warranty Service Information The terms of Part 2 replace or modify terms of Part 1 as specified for a particular country. Part 1 - General Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This Lenovo Limited Warranty applies only to Lenovo hardware products you purchased for your own use and not for resale. This Lenovo Limited Warranty is available in other languages at www.lenovo.com/warranty.

What this Warranty Covers Lenovo warrants that each Lenovo hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use during the warranty period. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase as shown on your sales receipt or invoice or as may be otherwise specified by Lenovo. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are as specified in "Part 3 - Warranty Service Information" below. This warranty only applies to products in the country or region of purchase. THIS WARRANTY IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY AND REPLACES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN THAT EVENT, SUCH WARRANTIES APPLY ONLY TO THE EXTENT AND FOR SUCH DURATION AS REQUIRED BY LAW AND ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON THE DURATION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY, THE ABOVE LIMITATION ON DURATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

How to Obtain Warranty Service If the product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, you may obtain warranty service by contacting Lenovo or a Lenovo approved Service Provider. A list of approved Service Providers and their telephone numbers is available at:

www.lenovo.com/support/phone. Warranty service may not be available in all locations and may differ from location to location. Charges may apply outside a Service Provider's normal service area. Contact a local Service Provider for information specific to your location.

Customer Responsibilities for Warranty Service Before warranty service is provided, you must take the following steps:

follow the service request procedures specified by the Service Provider 1 Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 2 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM Lenovo limited warranty

backup or secure all programs and data contained in the product

provide the Service Provider with all system keys or passwords

provide the Service Provider with sufficient, free, and safe access to your facilities to perform service

remove all data, including confidential information, proprietary information and personal information, from the product or, if you are unable to remove any such information, modify the information to prevent its access by another party or so that it is not personal data under applicable law. The Service Provider shall not be responsible for the loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, on a product returned or accessed for warranty service

remove all features, parts, options, alterations, and attachments not covered by the warranty

ensure that the product or part is free of any legal restrictions that prevent its replacement

if you are not the owner of a product or part, obtain authorization from the owner for the Service Provider to provide warranty service

What Your Service Provider Will Do to Correct Problems When you contact a Service Provider, you must follow the specified problem determination and resolution procedures. The Service Provider will attempt to diagnose and resolve your problem by telephone, e-mail or remote assistance. The Service Provider may direct you to download and install designated software updates. Some problems may be resolved with a replacement part that you install yourself called a

"Customer Replaceable Unit" or "CRU." If so, the Service Provider will ship the CRU to you for you to install. If your problem cannot be resolved over the telephone; through the application of software updates or the installation of a CRU, the Service Provider will arrange for service under the type of warranty service designated for the product under "Part 3 - Warranty Service Information" below. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to repair your product, the Service Provider will replace it with one that is at least functionally equivalent. If the Service Provider determines that it is unable to either repair or replace your product, your sole remedy under this Limited Warranty is to return the product to your place of purchase or to Lenovo for a refund of your purchase price.

Replacement Products and Parts When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovo's property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for the balance of the period remaining on the original product. 2 Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 3 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM Lenovo limited warranty

Use of Personal Contact Information If you obtain service under this warranty, you authorize Lenovo to store, use and process information about your warranty service and your contact information, including name, phone numbers, address, and e-mail address. Lenovo may use this information to perform service under this warranty. We may contact you to inquire about your satisfaction with our warranty service or to notify you about any product recalls or safety issues. In accomplishing these purposes, you authorize Lenovo to transfer your information to any country where we do business and to provide it to entities acting on our behalf. We may also disclose it where required by law. Lenovo's privacy policy is available at www.lenovo.com/.

What this Warranty Does not Cover This warranty does not cover the following:

uninterrupted or error-free operation of a product

loss of, or damage to, your data by a product

any software programs, whether provided with the product or installed subsequently

failure or damage resulting from misuse, abuse, accident, modification, unsuitable physical or operating environment, natural disasters, power surges, improper maintenance, or use not in accordance with product information materials

damage caused by a non-authorized service provider

failure of, or damage caused by, any third party products, including those that Lenovo may provide or integrate into the Lenovo product at your request

any technical or other support, such as assistance with how-to questions and those regarding product set-up and installation

products or parts with an altered identification label or from which the identification label has been removed

Limitation of Liability Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Provider's possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY: 1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. 3 Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 4 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM Lenovo limited warranty THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY

(INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. AS SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

Your Other Rights THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS ACCORDING TO THE APPLICABLE LAWS OF YOUR STATE OR JURISDICTION. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS UNDER A WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH LENOVO. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS, INCLUDING RIGHTS OF CONSUMERS UNDER LAWS OR REGULATIONS GOVERNING THE SALE OF CONSUMER GOODS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. Part 2 - Country-specific Terms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Australia

"Lenovo" means Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address:

Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: +61 2 8003 8200. Email: lensyd_au@lenovo.com The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

What this Warranty Covers:

Lenovo warrants that each hardware product that you purchase is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and conditions during the warranty period. If the product fails due to a covered defect during the warranty period, Lenovo will provide you a remedy under this Limited Warranty. The warranty period for the product starts on the original date of purchase specified on your sales receipt or invoice unless Lenovo informs you otherwise in writing. The warranty period and type of warranty service that apply to your product are set forth below in Part 3 - Warranty Service Information. THE BENEFITS GIVEN BY THIS WARRANTY ARE IN ADDITION TO YOUR RIGHTS AND REMEDIES AT LAW, INCLUDING THOSE UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

Replacement Products and Parts:

When warranty service involves the replacement of a product or part, the replaced product or part becomes Lenovo's property and the replacement product or part becomes your property. Only unaltered Lenovo products and parts are eligible for replacement. The replacement product or part provided by Lenovo may not be new, but it will be in good working order and at least functionally equivalent to the original product or part. The replacement product or part shall be warranted for 4 Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 5 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM Lenovo limited warranty the balance of the period remaining on the original product. Products and parts presented for repair may be replaced by refurbished products or parts of the same type rather than being repaired. Refurbished parts may be used to repair the product; and repair of the product may result in loss of data, if the product is capable of retaining user-generated data. The following is added to the same section in Part 1:

Use of Personal Contact Information:

Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal contact information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1988 by contacting Lenovo. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

Limitation of Liability:

Lenovo is responsible for loss or damage to your product only while it is in the Service Provider's possession or in transit, if the Service Provider is responsible for the transportation. Neither Lenovo nor the Service Provider is responsible for loss or disclosure of any data, including confidential information, proprietary information, or personal information, contained in a product. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND NOTWITHSTANDING THE FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN, SHALL LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS, OR SERVICE PROVIDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVEN IF INFORMED OF THEIR POSSIBILITY AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER THEORY OF LIABILITY: 1) THIRD PARTY CLAIMS AGAINST YOU FOR DAMAGES; 2) LOSS, DAMAGE OR DISCLOSURE OF YOUR DATA; 3) SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS REVENUE, GOODWILL OR ANTICIPATED SAVINGS. IN NO CASE SHALL THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF LENOVO, ITS AFFILIATESS, SUPPLIERS, RESELLERS OR SERVICE PROVIDERS FOR DAMAGES FROM ANY CAUSE EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF ACTUAL DIRECT DAMAGES, NOT TO EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS DO NOT APPLY TO DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY

(INCLUDING DEATH), DAMAGE TO REAL PROPERTY OR DAMAGE TO TANGIBLE PERSONAL PROPERTY FOR WHICH LENOVO IS LIABLE UNDER LAW. The following replaces the same section in Part 1:

Your Other Rights:

THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW. NOTHING IN THIS WARRANTY AFFECTS STATUTORY RIGHTS OR RIGHTS AT LAW, INCLUDING RIGHTS THAT CANNOT BE WAIVED OR LIMITED BY CONTRACT. 5 Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 6 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM Lenovo limited warranty For example, our products come with guarantees that cannot be excluded under the Australian Consumer Law. You are entitled to a replacement or refund for a major failure and compensation for any other reasonably foreseeable loss or damage. You are also entitled to have the products repaired or replaced if the products fail to be of acceptable quality and the failure does not amount to a major failure. New Zealand The following is added to the same section in Part 1:

Use of Personal Information:

Lenovo will not be able to perform our service under this warranty if you refuse to provide your information or do not wish us to transfer your information to our agent or contractor. You have the right to access your personal information and request correction of any errors in it pursuant to the Privacy Act 1993 by contacting Lenovo (Australia & New Zealand) Pty Limited ABN 70 112 394 411. Address: Level 10, North Tower, 1-5 Railway Street, Chatswood, NSW, 2067. Telephone: 61 2 8003 8200. Email: lensyd_au@lenovo.com Bangladesh, Cambodia, India, Indonesia, Nepal, Philippines, Vietnam and Sri Lanka The following is added to Part 1:

Dispute Resolution Disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Singapore. This warranty shall be governed, construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of Singapore, without regard to conflict of laws. If you acquired the product in India, disputes arising out of or in connection with this warranty shall be finally settled by arbitration held in Bangalore, India. Arbitration in Singapore shall be held in accordance with the Arbitration Rules of Singapore International Arbitration Center ("SIAC Rules") then in effect. Arbitration in India shall be held in accordance with the laws of India then in effect. The arbitration award shall be final and binding on the parties without appeal. Any award shall be in writing and set forth the findings of fact and the conclusions of law. All arbitration proceedings, including all documents presented in such proceedings shall be conducted in the English language. The English language version of this warranty prevails over any other language version in such proceedings.

European Economic Area (EEA) The following is added to Part 1:

Customers in the EEA may contact Lenovo at the following address: EMEA Service Organisation, Lenovo (International) B.V., Floor 2, Einsteinova 21, 851 01, Bratislava, Slovakia. Service under this warranty for Lenovo hardware products purchased in EEA countries may be obtained in any EEA country in which the product has been announced and made available by Lenovo. Russia The following is added to Part 1:

Product Service Life The product service life is four (4) years from the original date of purchase. 6 Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 7 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM Lenovo limited warranty Part 3 - Warranty Service Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Product or machine type Country or region of purchase Warranty period notebook:

20332, 80CX Taiwan, Korea Singapore China (Hong Kong S.A.R.), China

(Macau S.A.R.), India, Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand, Philippines, Vietnam, Bahrain, Kuwait, Oman, Qatar, Egypt, South Africa, Saudi Arabia, UAE, Algeria, Nigeria, Kenya, Sri Lanka Bosnia-Herzegovina, Croatia, Cyprus, Greece, Macedonia, Romania, Slovenia, Serbia, Poland, Hungary, Slovakia, Bulgaria Argentina, Colombia, Peru, Venezuela, Bolivia, Uruguay, Chile, Paraguay, Ecuador Austria, France, Germany, Iceland, Israel, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Switzerland, the United Kingdom Japan, Australia, New Zealand United States of America, Canada Russia, Ukraine, the Republic of Kazakhstan, Belarus, Turkmenistan, Azerbaijan, Georgia Brazil Mexico Belgium, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway, Spain, Sweden, Portugal Turkey, Czech Republic parts and labor -

1 year battery pack - 1 year parts and labor -

2 years battery pack - 1 year Types of warranty service 3, 4 1, 3, 4 1, 4 1, 3 4 1, 5 1, 3 1, 4 If required, the Service Provider will provide repair or exchange service depending on the type of warranty service specified for your product and the available service. Scheduling of service will depend upon the time of your call, parts availability, and other factors. 7 Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 8 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM Lenovo limited warranty

Types of Warranty Service 1 Customer Replaceable Unit (CRU) Service Under CRU Service, the Service Provider will ship CRUs to you at its cost for installation by you. CRU information and replacement instructions are shipped with your product and are available from Lenovo at any time upon request. CRUs that are easily installed by you are called "Self-

service CRUs". "Optional-service CRUs "are CRUs that may require some technical skill and tools. Installation of Self-service CRUs is your responsibility. You may request that a Service Provider install Optional-service CRUs under one of the other types of warranty service designated for your product. An optional service offering may be available for purchase from a Service Provider or Lenovo under which Self-service CRUs would be installed for you. You may find a list of CRUs and their designation in the publication that was shipped with your product or at www.lenovo.com/CRUs. The requirement to return a defective CRU, if any, will be specified in the instructions shipped with a replacement CRU. When return is required: 1) return instructions, a prepaid return shipping label, and a container will be included with the replacement CRU; and 2) you may be charged for the replacement CRU if the Service Provider does not receive the defective CRU from you within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement CRU. 2 On-site Service Under On-Site Service, a Service Provider will either repair or exchange the product at your location. You must provide a suitable working area to allow disassembly and reassembly of the product. Some repairs may need to be completed at a service center. If so, the Service Provider will send the product to the service center at its expense. 3 Courier or Depot Service Under Courier or Depot Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center, with shipping at the expense of the Service Provider. You are responsible for disconnecting the product and packing it in a shipping container provided to you to return your product to a designated service center. A courier will pick up your product and deliver it to the designated service center. The service center will return the product to you at its expense. 4 Customer Carry-In Service Under Customer Carry-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for collection. If you fail to collect the product, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 5 Mail-In Service Under Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged at a designated service center after you deliver it at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be returned to you at Lenovo's risk and expense, unless the Service Provider specifies otherwise. 8 Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 9 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM Lenovo limited warranty 6 Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service Under Customer Two-Way Mail-In Service, your product will be repaired or exchanged after you deliver it to a designated service center at your risk and expense. After the product has been repaired or exchanged, it will be made available to you for return shipping at your risk and expense. If you fail to arrange return shipment, the Service Provider may dispose of the product as it sees fit, with no liability to you. 7 Product Exchange Service Under Product Exchange Service, Lenovo will ship a replacement product to your location. You are responsible for its installation and verification of its operation. The replacement product becomes your property in exchange for the failed product, which becomes the property of Lenovo. You must pack the failed product in the shipping carton in which you received the replacement product and return it to Lenovo. Transportation charges, both ways, shall be at Lenovos expense. If you fail to use the carton in which the replacement product was received, you may be responsible for any damage to the failed product occurring during shipment. You may be charged for the replacement product if Lenovo does not receive the failed product within thirty (30) days of your receipt of the replacement product. 9 Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 10 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM Product specific Notices The notices in this appendix are specific to the product with the given MT number. Notices that are common for most Lenovo products are included in Appendix A. Notices of the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Energy star information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Energy aimed at saving money and protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. Lenovo is proud to offer our customers products with an ENERGY STAR compliant designation. Lenovo computers of the following machine types, if the ENERGY STAR mark is affixed, have been designed and tested to conform to the ENERGY STAR program requirements for computers.

20332, 80CX By using ENERGY STAR compliant products and taking advantage of the power-management features of your computer, you reduce the consumption of electricity. Reduced electrical consumption contributes to potential financial savings, a cleaner environment, and the reduction of greenhouse gas emissions. For more information about ENERGY STAR, visit http://www.energystar.gov. Lenovo encourages you to make efficient use of energy an integral part of your day-to-day operations. To help in this endeavor, Lenovo has preset the following power-management features to take effect when your computer has been inactive for a specified duration:

Table 1. ENERGY STAR power-management features Windows 8 Power plan: balanced (plugged in)

Turn off the display:

After 5 minutes

Put the computer to sleep:

After 30 minutes

Advanced power settings:

- Turn off hard disks:

After 20 minutes To awaken your computer from a Sleep mode, press any key on your keyboard. For more information about these settings, refer to your Windows Help and Support information system. 10 Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 11 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM Product specific Notices Electronic emissions notices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

The following information refers to Lenovo Yoga 2 11, machine type 20332, 80CX.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult an authorized dealer or service representative for help. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. Proper cables and connectors are available from Lenovo authorized dealers. Lenovo is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables or connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible party:

Lenovo (United States) Incorporated 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Telephone: (919) 294-5900 11 Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 12 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM Product specific Notices

Industry Canada Class B Emission Compliance Statement This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformit la rglementation dIndustrie Canada Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

German Class B Compliance Statement Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:

Hinweis fr Gerte der Klasse B EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen Vertrglichkeit Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/

336/EWG) zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse B ein. Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der Lenovo empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. Lenovo bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der Lenovo verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne Empfehlung der Lenovo gesteckt/

eingebaut werden. Deutschland:

Einhaltung des Gesetzes ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmittein Dieses Produkt entspricht dem Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln EMVG (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten). Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG (frher 89/336/EWG) in der Bundesrepublik Deutschland. Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Betriebsmitteln, EMVG vom 20. Juli 2007 (frher Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten), bzw. der EMV EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EC

(frher 89/336/EWG), fr Gerte der Klasse B. Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-

Konformittszeichen - CE - zu fhren. Verantwortlich fr die Konformittserklrung nach Paragraf 5 des EMVG ist die Lenovo (Deutschland) GmbH, Gropiusplatz 10, D-70563 Stuttgart. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraf 4 Abs. (1) 4:

Das Gert erfllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse B. 12 Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 13 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM Product specific Notices

European Union Compliance Statement Class B Compliance European Union - Compliance to the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council Directive 2004/108/

EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility. Lenovo cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the installation of option cards from other manufacturers. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class B Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The limits for Class B equipment were derived for typical residential environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. EU Contact Address: Lenovo, Einsteinova 21, 851 01 Bratislava, Slovakia 13 Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 14 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM Specifications Model Name:

Machine Type:

Note: The following specifications may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Lenovo reserves the Lenovo Yoga 2 11 20332, 80CX right to improve and/or change specifications at any time without notice. Form Factor Dimensions Weight LCD size Processor Processor Memory Type and speed Maximum supported capacity SSD Capacity Interface Display Touch Screen I/O Ports USB Audio Video/Audio Card reader Battery pack Type Cells/Capacity AC power adapter Input Output voltage Power Miscellaneous Camera 14 Appr. 298 mm 206 mm 17.2 mm Appr. 1.45 kg 11.6-inch View the system properties of your computer. You can do this as follows: Open the Control Panel, and then select System and Security System. DDR3L 4 GB 320G+16G/500G+16G SATA Multi-touch screen USB 2.0 1, USB 3.0 1 Combo audio jack 1 Micro HDMI 1 2 in 1 card reader (SD/MMC) Li-Polymer 4 cell, 34 Wh 100 - 240 V, 50 - 60 Hz AC 20 V DC 45 W 1.0 Mega, 720P HD Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 15 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo Onekey Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. 15 Yoga 2 11 SPEC&LLW EN.book Page 16 Monday, August 5, 2013 2:45 PM Lenovo Yoga 2 11 User Guide Read the safety notic es and important tips in the included manuals before using your computer.

Notes Before using the product, be sure to read Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide first. Some instructions in this guide may assume that you are using Windows 8. If you are using another Windows operating system, some operations may be slightly different. If you are using other operating systems, some operations may not apply to you. The features described in this guide are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer or your computer may include features that are not described in this user guide. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product. Please refer to the actual product. Regulatory Notice The Regulatory Notice provides information about the radio frequency and safety standards. Be sure to read it before using wireless devices on your computer. To refer to it, go to http://www.lenovo.com, click Support, and then click Users guides and manuals. First Edition (August 2013) Copyright Lenovo 2013. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant to a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Contents Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer ..................................................................................... 1 Top view ......................................................................................................................................................... 1 Left-side view ................................................................................................................................................ 8 Right-side view............................................................................................................................................ 11 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8............................................................................................ 12 Configuring the operating system for the first time .............................................................................. 12 Operating system interfaces ...................................................................................................................... 12 The charms ................................................................................................................................................... 13 Putting the computer to sleep or shutting it down ................................................................................ 15 Touch screen operation .............................................................................................................................. 17 Connecting to wireless LAN ..................................................................................................................... 21 Help and support ........................................................................................................................................ 22 Chapter 3........................................................................................................................................... 23 Lenovo OneKey Recovery System ................................................................................................. 23 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 24 Frequently asked questions ....................................................................................................................... 24 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................................... 26 Trademarks ....................................................................................................................................... 29 i Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Top view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b c d e f Note: The dashed areas indicate parts that are not visible externally.



Attention:

When closing the display panel, be careful not to leave pens or any other objects in between the display panel and the keyboard. Otherwise, the display panel may be damaged. 1 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer a b c Integrated camera (on select models) Wireless LAN antennas Multi-touch screen Use the camera for the video communication. Connect to the wireless LAN adapter to send and receive wireless radio signals. Functions as the visual display as well as one of the two primary input methods. Note: For details, see Touch screen operation on page 17. d Windows button Press this button to:

Toggle between the current view and the Start screen.

-or-

Wake up the computer from sleep mode. e f Built-in microphones Capture sound which can be used for video conferencing, voice narration, or audio recording. Touch pad The touch pad functions as a conventional mouse. Touch pad: To move the pointer on the screen, slide your fingertip over the pad in the direction in which you want the pointer to move. Touch pad buttons: The functions of the left/right side correspond to those of the left/right mouse button on a conventional mouse. Note: You can enable/disable the touch pad by pressing F6 (

). 2 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer

Keyboard function keys You can access certain system settings quickly by pressing the appropriate function keys.

:

:

:

:

:

:

Mutes/unmutes the sound. Decreases the volume level. Increases the volume level. Closes the currently active window. Refreshes the desktop or the currently active window. Enables/disables the touch pad.

:

:

:

:

:

:

Enables/disables Airplane mode. Displays all currently active apps. Turns on/off the backlight of the LCD screen. Toggles the display between the computer and an external device. Decreases the display brightness. Increases the display brightness. Note: By default, the screen brightness is set automatically (based on the ambient light level). If you want to adjust the brightness of the screen manually, open the charms bar and select Settings Change PC settings General Screen (Adjust my screen brightness automatically) and toggle the switch to Off. 3 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer

Screen orientation You can rotate the display panel to your preferred orientation.

The orientation of the display automatically changes (alternating between portrait and landscape modes) depending upon how you hold the computer.

To prevent automatic orientation, press the rotation lock button. It is located on the right edge of the computer. (See below illustration). 4 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer

Positioning the display panel The display panel can be opened to any angle up to 360 degrees. Notebook Mode Suitable for tasks that require a keyboard and mouse (such as creating documents, writing e-

mails, and so on). 5 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Stand Mode (Theater Mode) Suitable for tasks that require little or no touch (such as viewing photos or playing videos). Tablet Mode Suitable for tasks that require touching the screen often (such as surfing the Web, playing games, and so on). 6 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Tent Mode (Presentation Mode) Suitable for tasks that require limited interaction with the touch screen (such as displaying graphs or a PowerPoint presentations).



Attention:

Do not open the display with too much force, otherwise the panel or hinges may be damaged. Note: The keyboard and touch pad are automatically locked when the screen is opened beyond 190 degrees (approximately). 7 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Left-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

a b c d a AC power adapter jack Connect the AC power adapter here. b USB port Connects to USB devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 9. c Memory card slot Insert memory cards (not supplied) here. Note: For details, see Using memory cards (not supplied) on page 10. d HDMI port Connects to devices with HDMI input such as a TV or an external display. 8 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer

Connecting USB devices Your computer comes with two USB ports compatible with USB devices. The first time you plug a USB device into a particular USB port on your computer, Windows automatically installs a driver for that device. After the driver has been installed, you can disconnect and reconnect the device without performing any additional steps. Note: Typically, Windows detects a new device after it has been connected, and then installs the driver automatically. However, some devices may require you to install the driver before connecting. Check the documentation provided by the devices manufacturer before connecting the device. Before disconnecting a USB storage device, make sure your computer has finished transferring data to that device. Click the Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media icon in the Windows notification area to remove the device before disconnecting. Note: If your USB device uses a power cord, connect the device to a power source before connecting it. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized. 9 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer

Using memory cards (not supplied) Your computer supports the following types of memory cards:

Secure Digital (SD) card

MultiMediaCard (MMC) Notes:

Insert only one card in the slot at a time. This card reader does not support SDIO devices (e.g., SDIO Bluetooth, etc.). Inserting a memory card 1 Push the dummy card in until you hear a click. 2 Gently pull the dummy card out of the memory card slot. Note: The dummy card is used for preventing dust and small particles from entering the inside of your computer when the memory card slot is not in use. Retain the dummy card for future use. 3 Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place. Removing a memory card 1 Push the memory card in until you hear a click. 2 Gently pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. Note: Before removing the memory card, disable it by using the Windows safely remove hardware and eject media utility to avoid data corruption. 10 Chapter 1. Getting to know your computer Right-side view - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

ba c d e f g h a b c d e f g Power and battery status indicator Power button Novo button Rotation lock button Press this button to turn on the computer. When the computer is off, press this button to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System or the BIOS setup utility, or to enter the boot menu. Keeps the screen locked in portrait or landscape orientation. Locking the screen rotation will disable the gravity sensing function, thereby preventing the screen from changing its orientation automatically depending upon the angle at which it is held. Volume down button Decreases the volume level. Volume up button Increases the volume level. Combo audio jack Connects to headsets. Notes:

The combo audio jack does not support conventional microphones. The recording function may not be supported if third-party headphones or headsets are connected, due to different industry standards. h USB port Connects to USB 2.0 devices. Note: For details, see Connecting USB devices on page 9. 11 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8 Configuring the operating system for the first time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

You may need to configure the operating system when it is first used. The configuration process may include the procedures below:

Accepting the end user license agreement

Configuring the internet connection

Registering the operating system

Creating a user account Operating system interfaces - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Windows 8 comes with two main User Interface: the Start screen and the desktop. To switch from the Start screen to the desktop, do one of the following:

Select the desktop tile on the Start screen.

Press the Windows button.

Press Windows key + D. To switch from the desktop to the Start screen, do one of the following:

Select Start from the charms.

Move the pointer to the lower-left corner and then select the Start screen thumbnail when it is displayed. Start screen Desktop 12 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8 The charms - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

The five charms provide new and faster ways to perform many basic tasks, and are always available regardless of which app you are currently in. To display the charms, do one of the following:

Move the pointer to the upper-right or lower-right corner until the charms bar is displayed.

Use one finger to swipe in from the right edge of the screen until the charms bar is displayed.

Press Windows key + C. Search charm The Search charm is a powerful new way to find whatever you are looking for, including apps, settings and files. 13 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8 Share charm The Share charm lets you send links, photos, and more to your friends and social networks without leaving the app you are in. Start charm The Start charm is a fast way to go to the Start screen. Devices charm The Devices charm allows you to connect or send files to any external devices, such as digital cameras, TVs, or printers. Settings charm The Settings charm lets you perform basic tasks, such as setting the volume or shutting down the computer. Also, you can get to the Control Panel through the Settings charm when using the desktop screen. 14 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8 Putting the computer to sleep or shutting it down - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

When you have finished working with your computer, you can put it to sleep or shut it down.

Putting your computer to sleep If you will be away from your computer for a short time, put the computer to sleep. When the computer is in sleep mode, you can quickly wake it to resume use, bypassing the startup process. To put the computer to sleep, do one of the following:

Close the display panel.

Press the Power button.

Open the charms and then select Settings Power Sleep. Note: Put your computer to sleep before you move it. Moving your computer while the hard disk is spinning can damage the hard disk, causing loss of data. To wake the computer, do one of the following:

Press any key on the keyboard. (Notebook mode only)

Press the Power button.

Press the Windows button. 15

Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8

Shutting down the computer If you are not going to use your computer for a long time, shut it down. To shut down your computer:

1 Open the charms, and then select Settings

. 1 2 Select Power Shut down. 2 16 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8 Touch screen operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

The display panel can accept inputs like a tablet, using the multi-touch screen, or like a traditional notebook computer, using the keyboard and touch pad.

Multi-touch gestures You can touch the screen with one or more fingertips to perform a variety of tasks. Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Tap Tap once on an item. Press and hold Press your finger down and leave it there for a moment. Performs an action, such as starting an app, opening a link, or performing a command. Similar to left-clicking with a mouse. Allows you to see detailed information before selecting an action. Can also open a menu with more options. Similar to right-

clicking with a mouse. 17 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Zoom Move two fingers together or apart while touching the screen. Zooms in and out on visual apps, such as pictures and maps. Can also jump to the beginning or end of a list. Rotate Place two or more fingers on an item and then turn your hand. Slide Drag your finger across the screen. Turns an object. (Note: Not all items can be rotated, depending upon the app.) Pans or scrolls through lists and pages. Can also move an object or be used to draw or write, depending upon the app. Similar to pressing and holding to pan and to scrolling with a mouse. 18 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Swipe Start from any edge of the screen, then swipe inwards toward the center. Swiping down from the top edge or up from the bottom edge displays a task bar on the bottom of the screen with app commands, including save, edit, and delete. If you have an app currently open, you can also:

Swipe from the top edge to halfway down the screen without lifting your finger to dock that app on the left or right side of the screen. This allows you to keep two apps open simultaneously in a split-screen format.

Swipe from the top edge straight down to the bottom edge of the screen continuously without lifting your finger to close the currently open app. 19 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8

(continued) Frequently used gestures Tasks performed Swiping in from the left edge can:

Bring in and open an app currently running in the background. If there is more than one currently open app, you can:

Swipe in from the left to bring in an app and, without lifting your finger, push that app quickly back off the left edge of the screen. This displays a list of the apps currently running in the background. Swiping in from the right edge of the screen displays the charms. 20 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8 Connecting to wireless LAN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Enabling wireless connection To confirm that Airplane mode is disabled, go to the desktop and check the notification area. If you see the wireless function is enabled. icon displayed on the lower right, then Airplane mode is on. Otherwise, Note: Airplane mode should be disabled by default. If Airplane mode is on, do one of the following to enable the wireless function:

Press F7 (

) to disable Airplane mode.

Open the charms, select Settings then toggle Airplane mode switch to Off. Connecting to a wireless LAN to open the Network configuration page, and After wireless has been enabled, the computer will automatically scan for available wireless networks and display them in the wireless LAN network list. To connect to a wireless network, click the network name in the list, and then click Connect. Note: Some networks require a network security key or passphrase for connection. To connect to one of those networks, ask the network administrator or the Internet Service Provider (ISP) for the security key or passphrase. 21 Chapter 2. Starting to use Windows 8 Help and support - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

If you have any problems using the operating system, see the Windows Help and Support file. To open the Windows Help and Support file, do one of the following:

Select the Settings charm, then select Help.

Press Fn + F1. You can read the Windows Help and Support file on your computer. You can also get online help and support by clicking the link listed under More to explore. 22 Chapter 3. Lenovo OneKey Recovery System The Lenovo OneKey Recovery System is software designed to back up and restore your computer. You can use it to restore the system partition to its original status in case of a system failure. You can also create user backups for easy restoration as required. Note: To utilize the features of the OneKey Recovery System, your hard disk already includes a hidden partition by default to store the system image file and the OneKey Recovery System program files. This default partition is hidden for security reasons, which explains why the available disk space is less than the stated capacity.

Backing up the system partition You can back up the system partition to an image file. To back up the system partition:

1 Press the Novo button to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. 2 Click System Backup. 3 Select a back-up location and click Next to start the backup. Notes:

You can choose a back-up location on the local hard disk drive or an external storage device.

Remove the removable hard disk drive before starting the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. Otherwise, data from the removable hard disk drive might be lost. The back-up process may take a while. The back-up process is only available when Windows can be started normally.

Restoring You can choose to restore the system partition to its original status or to a previously created back-up point. To restore the system partition:

1 Press the Novo button to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. 2 Click System Recovery. The computer will restart to the recovery environment. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to restore the system partition to its original status or to a previously created back-up point. Notes:

The recovery process is irreversible. Make sure to back up any data you wish to save on the system partition before starting the recovery process. The recovery process may take a while. So be sure to connect the AC power adapter to your computer during the recovery process. The above instructions should be followed when Windows can be started normally.

If Windows cannot be started, then follow the steps below to start the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System:

1 Shut down the computer. 2 Press the Novo button. From the Novo button menu, select the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System and press Enter. 23 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Frequently asked questions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

This section lists frequently asked questions by category.

Finding information What safety precautions should I follow when using my computer?

The Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide which came with your computer contains safety precautions for using your computer. Read and follow all the precautions when using your computer. Where can I find the hardware specifications for my computer?

You can find hardware specification for your computer on the printed flyers which came with your computer. Where can I find warranty information?

For the warranty applicable to your computer, including the warranty period and type of warranty service, see the Lenovo limited warranty flyer that came with your computer.

Drivers and preinstalled software Where are the installation discs for Lenovo preinstalled software (desktop software)?

Your computer did not come with installation discs for Lenovo preinstalled software. If you need to reinstall any preinstalled software, you can find the installation program on the D partition of your hard disk. If you cannot find the installation program there, you can also download it from the Lenovo consumer support website. Where can I find drivers for the various hardware devices of my computer?

If your computer is preinstalled with a Windows operating system, Lenovo provides drivers for all the hardware devices that you need on the D partition of your hard disk. You can also download the latest device drivers from the Lenovo consumer support website.

Lenovo OneKey Recovery System Where are the recovery discs?

Your computer did not come with recovery discs. Use the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System if you need to restore the system to its factory status. What can I do if the back-up process fails?

If you can start the backup but it fails during the back-up process, try the following steps:

1 Close all open programs, and then restart the back-up process. 2 Check to see if the destination media is damaged. Select another path and then try again. 24 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting When do I need to restore the system to its factory status?

Use this feature when the operating system fails to start up. If there is critical data on the system partition, back it up before starting recovery.

BIOS setup utility What is the BIOS setup utility?

The BIOS setup utility is ROM-based software. It displays basic computer information and provides options for setting boot devices, security, hardware mode, and other preferences. How can I start the BIOS setup utility?

To start the BIOS setup utility:

1 Shut down the computer. 2 Press the Novo button and then select BIOS Setup. How can I change the boot mode?

There are two boot modes: UEFI and Legacy. To change the boot mode, start the BIOS setup utility and set boot mode to UEFI or Legacy support on the boot menu. When do I need to change the boot mode?

The default boot mode for your computer is UEFI mode. If you need to install a legacy Windows operating system (that is, any operating system before Windows 8) on your computer, you must change the boot mode to Legacy support. The legacy Windows operating system cannot be installed if you dont change the boot mode.

Getting help How can I contact the customer support center?

See Chapter 3. Getting help and service in the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. 25 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

If you do not find your problem here, see Chapter 1. The following section only describes problems that might negate the need to refer to the more comprehensive information in Chapter 1. Display problems When I turn on the computer, nothing appears on the screen. When I turn on the computer, only a white cursor appears on a blank screen. The screen goes blank while the computer is on.

If the screen is blank, make sure that:

- The AC power adapter is connected to the computer, and the power cord is plugged into a working electrical outlet.

- The computer power is on. (Press the Power button again for confirmation.) If these items are properly set, and the screen remains blank, have the computer serviced.

Restore backed-up files to your Windows environment or the entire contents of your hard disk to its original factory contents using the Lenovo OneKey Recovery System. If you still see only the cursor on the screen, have the computer serviced.

Your power management is enabled. Do one of the following to resume from sleep or hibernation mode:

- Press any key on the keyboard. (Notebook mode only)

- Press the Power button.

- Press the Windows button.

- Press F9 (

) to confirm whether the backlight of the LCD screen has been turned off. Sleep or hibernation problems The critical low-battery error message appears, and the computer immediately turns off. The computer enters sleep mode immediately after Power-on.

The battery power is getting low. Connect the AC power adapter to the computer.

Make sure that:

- The battery is charged.

- The operating temperature is within the acceptable range. See Chapter 2. Use and care Information in the Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide. Note: If the battery is charged and the temperature is within range, have the computer serviced. 26 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting The computer does not return from sleep mode and the computer does not work.

If the computer does not return from sleep mode, it may have entered hibernation mode automatically because the battery is depleted. Check the power indicator. If your computer is in sleep mode, connect the AC power adapter to the computer, then press the Windows button or the Power button. If your computer is in hibernation mode or powered-off, connect the AC power adapter to the computer, then press the Power button to resume operation. Note: If the system still does not return from sleep mode, your system has stopped responding, and you cannot turn off the computer; reset the computer. Unsaved data may be lost. To reset the computer, press and hold the Power button for five seconds or more. If the computer still does not reset, remove the AC power adapter. Display panel problems The screen is blank.

Do the following:

- If you are using the AC power adapter or the battery, and the battery status indicator is on, press F12 (

make the screen brighter.

) to

- If the power indicator is blinking, press the Power button to resume from sleep mode.

- If the problem persists, follow the solution in the next problem The screen is unreadable or distorted.

- Press F9 (

) to confirm whether the backlight of the LCD screen has been turned off.

Make sure that:

- The screen resolution and color quality are correctly set.

- The monitor type is correct. The screen is unreadable or distorted. Incorrect characters appear on the screen.

Are the operating system or programs installed correctly? If they are installed and configured correctly, have the computer serviced. Sound problems No sound can be heard from the speaker even when the volume is turned up.

Make sure that:

- The Mute function is off.

- The combo audio jack is not being used.

- Speakers are selected as the playback device. 27 Chapter 4. Troubleshooting Battery problems Your computer shuts down before the battery status indicator shows empty.

-or-

Your computer operates after the battery status indicator shows empty. A startup problem The Microsoft Windows operating system does not start.

Recharge the battery.

For details, see Lenovo OneKey Recovery System on page 23. OneKey Recovery System problems Backup cannot be made.

Make sure that you are currently using a Windows operating system.

There may not be enough space to store the backed-up data. You will need to free more hard disk space on your backup's partition. Failure to restore system partition to factory default.

The system partition (e.g. the partition size or the drive capacity of C) has been modified. Other problems Your computer does not respond. The connected external device does not work.

To turn off your computer, press and hold the Power button for five seconds or more. If the computer still does not respond, remove the AC power adapter.

Your computer might lock when it enters sleep mode during a communication operation. Disable the sleep timer when you are working on the network.

Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB while the computer power is on. Otherwise, you might damage your computer.

When using high power consumption external devices such as an external USB optical disk drive, use an external device power adapter. Otherwise, the device may not be recognized, or the system may shut down as a result. 28 Trademarks The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Lenovo Onekey Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. 29 L e n o v o C h n a i 2 0 1 3 en-US Rev. AA00 Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide New World. New Thinking.TM www.lenovo.com Copyright Lenovo 2011 P/N: 147500259-4.0 If your product is not working correctly, DO NOT RETURN IT TO THE STORE. For technical assistance, contact a Lenovo support specialist 24 hours a day by calling toll free 1-877-4 LENOVO (1-877-453-6686). Additionally, you can find support information and updates on the Lenovo Web site located at http://consumersupport.lenovo.com.

* Only for the users from the United States. Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 1 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Lenovo Safety and General Information Guide Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 2 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Notes

Before using the product, be sure to read Chapter 1. Important safety information first. Fifth Edition (July 2011) Copyright Lenovo 2011. LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services Administration GSA contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No. GS-35F-05925. Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page i Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Contents Chapter 1. Important safety information ...............................1 Conditions that require immediate action................................................1 Safety guidelines ............................3 Service and upgrades ................. 3 Power cords and power adapters ........................................ 3 Extension cords and related devices .......................................... 4 Plugs and outlets......................... 4 Power supply statement ............ 5 External devices .......................... 5 Batteries ........................................ 6 Rechargeable battery notice ...... 6 Lithium coin cell battery notice............................................. 7 Heat and product ventilation.... 7 CD and DVD drive safety.......... 8 Laser compliance statement ...... 9 Electrical current safety information .................................10 Liquid crystal display (LCD) notice............................................11 Using headphones or earphones ....................................11 Additional safety information .................................12 Chapter 2. Use and care Information .............................13 Caring for your computer...........13 Being careful about where and how you work. ..........................13 Notice of static-electricity .........14 Being gentle with your computer .....................................14 Carrying your computer properly.......................................15 For outdoor use ..........................15 Handling storage media and drives properly .......................... 15 Data safety .................................. 16 Taking care in setting passwords................................... 16 Cleaning the cover of your computer..................................... 16 Cleaning your computer keyboard ..................................... 17 Cleaning your computer display......................................... 17 Other important tips ................. 18 Accessibility and comfort ........... 19 Ergonomic information ............ 19 What if you are traveling?........ 19 Questions about vision? ........... 19 Maintenance ................................. 20 General tips for maintenance... 20 Chapter 3. Getting help and service ....................................21 Getting help on the Web............. 22 Calling the customer support center ............................................. 22 Getting help around the world ............................................. 24 Lenovo product service information for Taiwan............... 24 Appendix A. Notices ..............25 Trademarks.............................40 i Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page ii Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 1 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 1. Important safety information This information can help you safely use your notebook personal computer. Follow and retain all information included with your computer. The information in this document does not alter the terms of your purchase agreement or the Lenovo Limited Warranty. Customer safety is important. Our products are developed to be safe and effective. However, personal computers are electronic devices. Power cords, power adapters, and other features can create potential safety risks that can result in physical injury or property damage, especially if misused. To reduce these risks, follow the instructions in this document carefully. By carefully following the information contained in this document and provided with your product, you can help protect yourself from hazards and create a safer computer work environment. Conditions that require immediate action - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Products can become damaged due to misuse or neglect. Some product damage is serious enough that the product should not be used again until it has been inspected and, if necessary, repaired by an authorized servicer. As with any electronic device, pay close attention to the product when it is turned on. On very rare occasions, you might notice an odor or see a puff of smoke or sparks vent from your product. Or you might hear sounds like popping, cracking or hissing. These conditions might merely mean that an internal electronic component has failed in a safe and controlled manner. Or, they might indicate a potential safety issue. However, do not take risks or attempt to diagnose the situation yourself. Contact the customer support center for further guidance. For a list of service and support phone numbers, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/. Frequently inspect your computer and its components for damages or signs of danger. If you have any question about the condition of a component, do not use the product. Contact the customer support center or the product manufacturer for instructions on how to inspect the product and have it repaired, if necessary. In the unlikely event that you notice any of the following conditions, or if you have any safety concerns with your product, stop using the product and unplug it from the power source and telecommunication lines until you can speak to the customer support center for further guidance. 1 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 2 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 1. Important safety information

Power cords, plugs, power adapters, extension cords, surge protectors, or power supplies that are cracked, broken, or damaged

Signs of overheating, smoke, sparks, or fire

Damage to a battery (such as cracks, dents, or creases), discharge from a battery, or a buildup of foreign substances on the battery

A cracking, hissing or popping sound, or strong odor that comes from the product

Signs that liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen on to the computer product, the power cord or power adapter

The computer product, power cord, or power adapter has been exposed to water

The product has been dropped or damaged in any way

The product does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions Note: If you notice these conditions with a product (such as an extension cord) that is not manufactured for or by Lenovo, stop using that product until you can contact the product manufacturer for further instructions, or until you get a suitable replacement. 2 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 3 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 1. Important safety information Safety guidelines - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Always observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury and property damage.

Service and upgrades Do not attempt to service a product yourself unless instructed to do so by the customer support center or your documentation. Note: Some computer parts can be upgraded or replaced by the customer. Replacement parts approved for customer installation are referred to as Customer Replaceable Units, or CRUs. Lenovo provides documentation with instructions when it is appropriate for customers to install options or replace CRUs. You must closely follow all instructions when installing or replacing parts. The Off state of a power indicator does not necessarily mean that voltage levels inside a product are zero. Before you remove the covers from a product equipped with an AC power cord, always make sure that the power is turned off and that the product is unplugged from any power source. Before replacing any CRUs, turn off the computer and wait three to five minutes to let the computer cool before opening the cover.

Power cords and power adapters Use only the power cords and power adapters supplied by the product manufacturer. The power cord and power adapter are intended for use with this product only. They should never be used with any other product. The power cords shall be safety approved. For Germany, it shall be H05VV-F, 3G, 0.75 mm2, or better. For other countries, the suitable types shall be used accordingly. Never wrap a power cord around a power adapter or other object. Doing so can stress the cord in ways that can cause the cord to fray, crack, or crimp. This can present a safety hazard. Always route power cords or any other cables so that they will not be walked on, tripped over, or pinched by objects. 3 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 4 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 1. Important safety information Protect power cords and power adapters from liquids. For instance, do not leave your power cord or power adapter near sinks, tubs, toilets, or on floors that are cleaned with liquid cleansers. Liquids can cause a short circuit, particularly if the power cord or power adapter has been stressed by misuse. Liquids also can cause gradual corrosion of power cord terminals and/or the connector terminals on a power adapter, which can eventually result in overheating. Always connect power cords and signal cables in the correct order and ensure that all power cord connectors are securely and completely plugged into receptacles. Do not use any power adapter that shows corrosion at the ac input pins or shows signs of overheating (such as deformed plastic) at the ac input or anywhere on the power adapter. Do not use any power cords where the electrical contacts on either end show signs of corrosion or overheating or where the power cord appears to have been damaged in any way.

Extension cords and related devices Ensure that extension cords, surge protectors, uninterruptible power supplies, and power strips that you use are rated to handle the electrical requirements of the product. Never overload these devices. If power strips are used, the load should not exceed the power strip input rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads, power requirements, and input ratings.

Plugs and outlets If a receptacle (power outlet) that you intend to use with your computer equipment appears to be damaged or corroded, do not use the outlet until it is replaced by a qualified electrician. Do not bend or modify the plug. If the plug is damaged, contact the manufacturer to obtain a replacement. Do not share an electrical outlet with other home or commercial appliances that draw large amounts of electricity; otherwise, unstable voltage might damage your computer, data, or attached devices. 4 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 5 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 1. Important safety information Some products are equipped with a three-pronged plug. This plug fits only into a grounded electrical outlet. This is a safety feature. Do not defeat this safety feature by trying to insert it into a non-grounded outlet. If you cannot insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician for an approved outlet adapter or to replace the outlet with one that enables this safety feature. Never overload an electrical outlet. The overall system load should not exceed 80 percent of the branch circuit rating. Consult an electrician for more information if you have questions about power loads and branch circuit ratings. Be sure that the power outlet you are using is properly wired, easily accessible, and located close to the equipment. Do not fully extend power cords in a way that will stress the cords. Be sure that the power outlet provides the correct voltage and current for the product you are installing. Carefully connect and disconnect the equipment from the electrical outlet.

Power supply statement Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following label attached. Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact a service technician.

External devices Do not connect or disconnect any external device cables other than USB and 1394 cables while the computer power is on; otherwise, you might damage your computer. To avoid possible damage to attached devices, wait at least five seconds after the computer is shut down to disconnect external devices. 5 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 6 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 1. Important safety information

Batteries Personal computers manufactured by Lenovo contain a coin cell battery to provide power to the system clock. In addition, many mobile products, such as notebook computers, utilize a rechargeable battery pack to provide system power when in portable mode. Batteries supplied by Lenovo for use with your product have been tested for compatibility and should only be replaced with approved parts. Never attempt to open or service any battery. Do not crush, puncture, or incinerate batteries or short circuit the metal contacts. Do not expose the battery to water or other liquids. Only recharge the battery pack strictly according to instructions included in the product documentation. Battery abuse or mishandling can cause the battery to overheat, which can cause gasses or flame to vent from the battery pack or coin cell. If your battery is damaged, or if you notice any discharge from your battery or the buildup of foreign materials on the battery leads, stop using the battery and obtain a replacement from the battery manufacturer. Batteries can degrade when they are left unused for long periods of time. For some rechargeable batteries (particularly Lithium Ion batteries), leaving a battery unused in a discharged state could increase the risk of a battery short circuit, which could shorten the life of the battery and can also pose a safety hazard. Do not let rechargeable Lithium-Ion batteries completely discharge or store these batteries in a discharged state.

Rechargeable battery notice Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the battery pack. Attempting to do so can cause an explosion, or liquid leakage from the battery pack. A battery pack other than the one specified by Lenovo, or a disassembled or modified battery pack is not covered by the warranty. If the rechargeable battery pack is incorrectly replaced, there is danger of an explosion. The battery pack contains a small amount of harmful substances. To avoid possible injury:

Replace only with a battery of the type recommended by Lenovo.

Keep the battery pack away from fire.

Do not expose it to water or rain.

Do not attempt to disassemble it.

Do not short-circuit it. 6 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 7 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 1. Important safety information

Keep it away from children.

Do not drop the battery pack. Do not put the battery pack in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations. If the battery pack is to be stored separately, place it in a dry environment of a temperature between 10-35 C and keep it away from direct sunlight. To extend battery life, we recommend you charge the battery to approximately 30 to 50% capacity and recharge it every three months to prevent the battery from over-discharging. This system does not support batteries that are not genuine Lenovo-made or authorized. The system will continue to boot, but may not charge unauthorized batteries.

Lithium coin cell battery notice Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. When replacing the lithium coin cell battery, use only the same or an equivalent type that is recommended by the manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of. Do not:

Throw or immerse into water

Heat to more than 100C (212F)

Repair or disassemble Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.

Heat and product ventilation Computers, AC adapters, and many accessories can generate heat when turned on and when batteries are charging. Notebook computers can generate a significant amount of heat due to their compact size. Always follow these basic precautions:

When your computer is turned on or the battery is charging, the base, the palm rest, and some other parts may become hot. Avoid keeping your hands, your lap, or any other part of your body in contact with a hot section of the computer for any extended length of time. When you use the 7 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 8 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 1. Important safety information keyboard, avoid keeping your palms on the palm rest for a prolonged period of time. Your computer generates some heat during normal operation. The amount of heat depends on the amount of system activity and the battery charge level. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, could cause discomfort or even a skin burn. Periodically take breaks from using the keyboard by lifting your hands from the palm rest; and be careful not to use the keyboard for any extended length of time.

Do not operate your computer or charge the battery near flammable materials or in explosive environments.

Ventilation slots, fans and/or heat sinks are provided with the product for safety, comfort, and reliable operation. These features might inadvertently become blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, carpet, or other flexible surface. Never block, cover, or disable these features.

When the AC adapter is connected to an electrical outlet and your computer, it generates heat. Do not place the adapter in contact with any part of your body while using it. Never use the AC adapter to warm your body. Extended contact with your body, even through clothing, may cause a skin burn. For your safety, always follow these basic precautions with your computer:

Keep the cover closed whenever the computer is plugged in.

Regularly inspect the outside of the computer for dust accumulation.

Remove dust from vents and any perforations in the bezel. More frequent cleanings might be required for computers in dusty or high-traffic areas.

Do not restrict or block any ventilation openings.

Do not operate your computer inside furniture, as this might increase the risk of overheating.

Airflow temperatures into the computer should not exceed 35C (95F).

CD and DVD drive safety CD and DVD drives spin discs at a high speed. If a CD or DVD is cracked or otherwise physically damaged, it is possible for the disc to break apart or even shatter when the CD drive is in use. To protect against possible injury due to this situation, and to reduce the risk of damage to your computer, do the following:

Always store CD/DVD discs in their original packaging. 8 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 9 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 1. Important safety information

Always store CD/DVD discs out of direct sunlight and away from direct heat sources.

Remove CD/DVD discs from the computer when not in use.

Do not bend or flex CD/DVD discs, or force them into the computer or their packaging.

Check CD/DVD discs for cracks before each use. Do not use cracked or damaged discs.

Laser compliance statement Some personal computer models are equipped from the factory with a CD or DVD drive. CD and DVD drives are also sold separately as options. CD and DVD drives are laser products. The drive's classification label (shown below) is on the surface of the drive. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1 KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT Example of the label These drives are certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of the Department of Health and Human Services 21 Code of Federal Regulations

(DHHS 21 CFR) Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products. Elsewhere, these drives are certified to conform to the requirements of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 60825-1 and CENELEC EN 60825-1 for Class 1 laser products. Class 1 laser products are not considered hazardous. The design of the laser system and the optical storage drive ensures that there is no exposure to laser 9 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 10 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 1. Important safety information radiation above a Class 1 level during normal operation, user maintenance, or servicing. When a CD or DVD drive is installed, note the following handling instructions. Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure. Do not remove the drive covers. Removing the covers of the CD or DVD drive could result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable parts inside the CD or DVD drive. Some CD and DVD drives contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser diode. Note the following statement. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.

Electrical current safety information Electric current from power, telephone, and communication cables is hazardous. To avoid a shock hazard:

Do not use your computer during a lightning storm.

Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical storm.

Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical outlet.

Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to this product.

Whenever possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal cables.

Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or structural damage.

Disconnect the attached power cords, battery pack, and all the cables before you open the device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.

Do not use your computer until you have closed the cover. Never use the computer when the cover is open. 10 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 11 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 1. Important safety information

Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following procedures when installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached devices. To connect:

1.Turn everything OFF. 2.First, attach all cables to devices. 3.Attach signal cables to connectors. 4.Attach power cords to outlets. 5.Turn devices ON. To disconnect:

1.Turn everything OFF. 2.First, remove power cords from outlets. 3.Remove signal cables from connectors. 4.Remove all cables from devices. The power cord must be disconnected from the wall outlet or receptacle before installing all other electrical cables connected to the Lenovo computer. The power cord may be reconnected to the wall outlet or receptacle only after all other electrical cables have been connected to the computer.

Liquid crystal display (LCD) notice For products with mercury-containing fluorescent lamps: (non-LED LCD) The fluorescent lamp in the liquid crystal display contains mercury; dispose according to local, state, or federal laws. The LCD is made of glass, and rough handling or dropping the computer can cause the LCD to break. If the LCD breaks and the internal fluid gets into your eyes or on your hands, immediately wash the affected areas with water for at least 15 minutes; if any symptoms are present after washing, get medical care.

Using headphones or earphones If your computer has both a headphone connector and an audio-out connector, always use the headphone connector for headphones (also called a headset) or earphones. 11 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 12 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 1. Important safety information Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. Adjustment of the equalizer to maximum increases the earphones and headphones output voltage and therefore the sound pressure level. Excessive use of headphones or earphones for a long period of time at high volume can be dangerous if the output of the headphones or earphone connectors do not comply with specifications of EN 50332-2. The headphone output connector of your computer complies with EN 50332-2 Sub clause 7. This specification limits the computer's maximum wide band true RMS output voltage to 150 mV. To help protect against hearing loss, ensure that the headphones or earphones you use also comply with EN 50332-2 (Clause 7 limits) for a wide band characteristic voltage of 75 mV. Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-2 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels. If your Lenovo computer came with headphones or earphones in the package, as a set, combination of the headphones or earphones and the computer already complies with the specifications of EN 50332-1. If different headphones or earphones are used, ensure that they comply with EN 50332-1

(Clause 6.5 Limitation Values). Using headphones that do not comply with EN 50332-1 can be dangerous due to excessive sound pressure levels.

Additional safety information Plastic bags can be dangerous. Keep plastic bags away from babies and children to avoid danger of suffocation.

(Safety Notice for users in Australia) Do not connect phone line while using tablet mode.

(Notice for users in the U.S.A.) Handling the cord on this product or cords associated with accessories sold with this product will expose you to lead, a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

(GOST compliance mark) 12 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 13 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 2. Use and care Information Caring for your computer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Though your computer is designed to function reliably in normal work environments, you need to use common sense in handling it. By following these important tips, you will get the most use and enjoyment out of your computer.

Being careful about where and how you work.

Do not eat or smoke over your keyboard. Particles that fall into your keyboard can cause damage.

Store packing materials safely out of the reach of children to prevent the risk of suffocation from plastic bags.

Keep your computer away from magnets, activated cellular phones, electrical appliances, or speakers (within 13 cm or 5 in).

Avoid subjecting your computer to extreme temperatures (below 5C/41F or above 35C/95F).

Some appliances, such as certain portable desktop fans or air purifiers, can produce negative ions. If a computer is close to such an appliance, and is exposed for an extended time to air containing negative ions, it may become electrostatically charged. Such a charge may be discharged through your hands when you touch the keyboard or other parts of the computer, or through connectors on I/O devices connected to it. Even though this kind of electrostatic discharge (ESD) is the opposite of a discharge from your body or clothing to the computer, it poses the same risk of a computer malfunction. Your computer is designed and manufactured to minimize any effects of electrostatic charge. An electrostatic charge above a certain limit, however, can increase the risk of ESD. Therefore, when using the computer close to an appliance that can produce negative ions, give special attention to the following:

- Avoid directly exposing your computer to the air from an appliance that can produce negative ions.

- Keep your computer and peripherals as far as possible from such an appliance.

- Wherever possible, ground your computer to facilitate safe electrostatic discharge. 13 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 14 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 2. Use and care Information

Notice of static-electricity When you handle options or CRUs, or perform any work inside the computer, take the following precautions to avoid static-electricity damage:

- Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around you.

- Always handle components carefully. Handle adapters, memory modules, and other circuit boards by the edges. Never touch exposed circuitry.

- Prevent others from touching components.

- When you install a static-sensitive option or CRU, touch the static-

protective package containing the part to a metal expansion-slot cover or other unpainted metal surface on the computer for at least two seconds. This reduces static electricity in the package and your body.

- Whenever possible, remove the static-sensitive part from the static-

protective packaging and install the part without setting it down. When this is not possible, place the static-protective packaging on a smooth, level surface and place the part on it.

- Do not place the part on the computer cover or other metal surface.

Being gentle with your computer

Avoid placing any objects (including paper) between the display and the keyboard or under the keyboard.

Do not drop, bump, scratch, twist, hit, vibrate, push, or place heavy objects on your computer, display, or external devices.

Avoid turning the display beyond 130. 14 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 15 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 2. Use and care Information

Carrying your computer properly

Before moving your computer, be sure to remove any media, turn off attached devices, and disconnect cords and cables.

Be sure your computer is in sleep or hibernation mode, or turned off, before moving it. This will prevent damage to the hard disk drive and data loss.

When picking up your open computer, hold it by the bottom. Do not pick up or hold your computer by the display.

Use a quality carrying case that provides adequate cushion and protection. Do not pack your computer in a tightly packed suitcase or bag.

For outdoor use

Backup your critical data before you take your computer outdoors.

Ensure that the battery is full.

Be sure to turn off the power and close the LCD well.

When you leave the computer in your car, place it on the back seat to avoid being insolated.

Carry the AC adapter and power cord with the computer.

Handling storage media and drives properly

If your computer comes with an optical drive, do not touch the surface of a disc or the lens on the tray.

Wait until you hear the CD or DVD click into the center pivot of an optical drive before closing the tray.

When installing your hard disk, follow the instructions shipped with your hardware, and apply pressure only where needed on the device. 15 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 16 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 2. Use and care Information

Data safety

Do not delete unknown files or change the name of files or directories that were not created by you; otherwise, your computer software might fail to work.

Be aware that accessing network resources can leave your computer vulnerable to computer viruses, hackers, spyware, and other malicious activities that might damage your computer, software, or data.

It is your responsibility to ensure that you have adequate protection in the form of firewalls, antivirus software, and anti-spyware software and keep this software up to date.

Taking care in setting passwords

Remember your passwords. If you forget a supervisor or hard disk password, Lenovo authorized service providers will not reset it, and you might have to replace your system board or hard disk drive.

Cleaning the cover of your computer Occasionally clean your computer as follows:

1 Prepare a mixture of a gentle kitchen-use detergent (one that does not contain abrasive powder or strong chemicals such as acid or alkaline). Use 5 parts water to 1 part detergent. 2 Absorb the diluted detergent into a sponge. 3 Squeeze excess liquid from the sponge. 4 Wipe the cover with the sponge, using a circular motion and taking care not to let any excess liquid drip. 5 Wipe the surface to remove the detergent. 6 Rinse the sponge with clean running water. 7 Wipe the cover with the clean sponge. 8 Wipe the surface again with a dry, soft lint-free cloth. 9 Wait for the surface to dry completely and remove any cloth fibers from the computer surface. Note: Shut down the computer and then disconnect the power cord before cleaning the computer. 16 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 17 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 2. Use and care Information

Cleaning your computer keyboard 1 Absorb some isopropyl rubbing alcohol on a soft, dust-free cloth. 2 Wipe each keytop surface with the cloth. Wipe the keys one by one; if you wipe several keys at a time, the cloth may hook onto an adjacent key and possibly damage it. Make sure that no liquid drips onto or between the keys. 3 Allow to dry. 4 To remove any crumbs and dust from beneath the keys, you can use a camera blower with a brush or cool air from a hair drier. Note: Avoid spraying cleaner directly on the display or the keyboard.

Cleaning your computer display 1 Gently wipe the display with a dry, soft lint-free cloth. If you see a scratchlike mark on your display, it might be a stain transferred from the keyboard when the cover was pressed from the outside. 2 Wipe or dust the stain gently with a soft, dry cloth. 3 If the stain remains, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with water or a 50-50 mixture of isopropyl alcohol and water that does not contain impurities. 4 Wring out as much of the liquid as you can. 5 Wipe the display again; do not let any liquid drip into the computer. 6 Be sure to dry the display before closing it. 17 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 18 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 2. Use and care Information

Other important tips

Do not put the battery pack in trash that is disposed of in landfills. When disposing of the battery, comply with local ordinances or regulations and your companys safety standards.

Register your Lenovo products with Lenovo (refer to the Web page:

http://consumersupport.lenovo.com). This can help authorities return your computer to you if it is lost or stolen. Registering your computer also enables Lenovo to notify you about possible technical information and upgrades.

Only an authorized Lenovo repair technician should disassemble and repair your computer.

Do not modify or tape the latches to keep the display open or closed.

Take care not to turn your computer over while the AC adapter is plugged in. This could break the adapter plug.

Turn off your computer if you are replacing a device, or else verify that the device is warm- or hot-swappable.

Before you install any of the following devices, touch a metal table or a grounded metal object. This action reduces any static electricity from your body. The static electricity could damage the device.

- Memory Card, such as SD Card, Memory Stick, MultiMediaCard, and Memory Stick Pro card.

- Memory module

When transferring data to or from a Flash Media Card, such as an SD card, do not put your computer in sleep or hibernation mode before the data transfer is complete. To do so might cause damage to your data. 18 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 19 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 2. Use and care Information Accessibility and comfort - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ergonomic information Working in the virtual office may mean adapting to frequent changes in your environment. Following some simple rules will make things easier and bring you the maximum benefits of your computer. Keeping in mind such basics as good lighting and proper seating, for example, can help you improve your performance and achieve greater comfort. Note: This example shows someone in a conventional setting. Even if you work in a casual, less conventional setting, many of the tips in this section still apply. Develop good habits, and they will serve you well. Head and neck in upright. Good back support and seat height Parallel to the floor A suitable brightness avoid glare or reflection Type softly Support the forearms Flat on the floor

What if you are traveling?

It may not be possible to observe the best ergonomic practices when you are using your computer while on the move or in a casual setting. Regardless of the setting, try to observe as many of the tips as possible. Sitting properly and using adequate lighting, for example, will help you maintain desirable levels of comfort and performance.

Questions about vision?

Your computers visual display screen is designed to meet the highest standards and to provide you with clear, crisp images and large, bright displays that are easy to see, yet easy on the eyes. Of course, any concentrated and sustained visual activity can be tiring. If you have questions on eye fatigue or visual discomfort, consult a vision care specialist for advice. 19 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 20 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 2. Use and care Information Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

An important part of owning your computer is maintenance. With proper care, you can avoid common problems. The following sections provide information that can help you to keep your computer running smoothly.

General tips for maintenance 1 Check the capacity of your hard disk drive from time to time. If the hard disk drive gets too full, the operating system will slow down and might produce errors. 2 Empty your recycle bin on a regular basis.

To free up disk space, uninstall unused application programs.

Clean out your Inbox, Sent, and Trash folders from your e-mail client program.

At least once a week, make a point to back up your data. If critical data is present, it is a good idea to perform a daily backup. Lenovo has many backup options available for your computer. CD-RW drives and CD-RW/DVD drives are available for most computers and are easily installed.

Use or schedule System Restore to take a system snapshot periodically. Note: Always take a system snapshot before installing new drivers, updating software, or installing new software.

Update device drivers and BIOS when needed.

Profile your machine at http://consumersupport.lenovo.com to keep up to date with current drivers and revisions.

Keep up to date on device drivers on other non-Lenovo hardware. You might want to read the device driver information release notes prior to updating for compatibility or known issues.

Keep a log book. Entries might include major hardware or software changes, driver updates, minor issues you have experienced and how you resolved them.

If required, you can find your countrys customer support center at the following Web address: http://consumersupport.lenovo.com. When calling the customer support center, please make sure you have your machine type, model, and serial number available and the computer is in front of you. Also, if the machine is producing error codes, it is helpful to have the error screen on or the message written down. 20 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 21 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 3. Getting help and service If you need help, service, technical assistance, or just want more information about Lenovo computers, you will find a wide variety of sources available from Lenovo to assist you. This section contains information about where to go for additional information about Lenovo computers, what to do if you experience a problem with your computer, and whom to call for service should it be necessary. Microsoft Service Packs are the latest software source for Windows product updates. They are available by means of a Web download (connection charges may apply) or from a disc. For more specific information and links, go to the Microsoft Web site at http://www.microsoft.com/. Lenovo offers Up and Running technical assistance with installation of, or questions related to, Service Packs for your Lenovo-preinstalled Microsoft Windows product. 21 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 22 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 3. Getting help and service Getting help on the Web - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

The Lenovo Web site on the World Wide Web has up-to-date information about Lenovo computers and support. You can find support information for your Lenovo computer at http://consumersupport.lenovo.com. Research this Web site to learn how to solve problems, find new ways to use your computer, and learn about options that can make working with your Lenovo computer even easier. Calling the customer support center - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

If you have tried to correct the problem yourself and still need help, during the warranty period, you can get help and information by telephone through the customer support center. The following services are available during the warranty period:

Problem determination - Trained personnel are available to assist you with determining if you have a hardware problem and deciding what action is necessary to fix the problem.

Lenovo hardware repair - If the problem is determined to be caused by Lenovo hardware under warranty, trained service personnel are available to provide the applicable level of service.

Engineering change management - Occasionally, there might be changes that are required after a product has been sold. Lenovo or your reseller, if authorized by Lenovo, will make selected Engineering Changes (ECs) available that apply to your hardware. The following items are not covered:

Replacement or use of parts not manufactured for or by Lenovo or non warranted parts

Identification of software problem sources

Changes, modifications, or upgrades to device drivers

Installation and maintenance of network operating systems (NOS)

Installation and maintenance of application programs Note: To determine if your Lenovo hardware product is under warranty and when the warranty expires, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/. 22 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 23 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 3. Getting help and service Refer to your Lenovo hardware warranty for a full explanation of Lenovo warranty terms. Be sure to retain your proof of purchase to obtain warranty service. If possible, be near your computer when you make your call in case the technical assistance representative needs to help you resolve a computer problem. Please ensure that you have downloaded the most current drivers and system updates, and recorded information before you call. When calling for technical assistance, please have the following information available:

Machine Type and Model

Serial number of your computer and your proof of purchase

Description of the problem

Hardware and software configuration information for your system Note: For the latest list of customer support center telephone numbers and hours of operation, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/. If the number for your country or region is not listed, contact your Lenovo reseller or Lenovo marketing representative. 23 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 24 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Chapter 3. Getting help and service Getting help around the world - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

If you travel with your computer or relocate it to a country where your Lenovo machine type is sold, your computer might be eligible for International Warranty Service, which automatically entitles you to obtain warranty service throughout the warranty period. Service will be performed by service providers authorized to perform warranty service. Service methods and procedures vary by country, and some services might not be available in all countries. Service centers in certain countries might not be able to service all models of a particular machine type. In some countries, fees and restrictions might apply at the time of service. Note: To determine whether your computer is eligible for International Warranty Service and to view a list of the countries where service is available, go to http://consumersupport.lenovo.com/. Lenovo product service information for Taiwan - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

24 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 25 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Appendix A. Notices Notices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Lenovo may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in all countries. Consult your local Lenovo representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to a Lenovo product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Lenovo product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any Lenovo intellectual property right may be used instead. However, it is the users responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any other product, program, or service. Lenovo may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:

Lenovo (United States), Inc. 1009 Think Place - Building One Morrisville, NC 27560 U.S.A. Attention: Lenovo Director of Licensing LENOVO PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. Lenovo may make improvements and/or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. 25 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 26 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Appendix A. Notices The products described in this document are not intended for use in implantation or other life support applications where malfunction may result in injury or death to persons. The information contained in this document does not affect or change Lenovo product specifications or warranties. Nothing in this document shall operate as an express or implied license or indemnity under the intellectual property rights of Lenovo or third parties. All information contained in this document was obtained in specific environments and is presented as an illustration. The result obtained in other operating environments may vary. Lenovo may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. Any references in this publication to non-Lenovo Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Lenovo product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the result obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurements may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment. The software interface and hardware configuration described in all the manuals included with your computer may not match the actual configuration of the computer you purchased.

Export classification notice This product is subject to the United States Export Administration Regulations (EAR) and has an Export Classification Control Number

(ECCN) of 4A994.b. It can be re-exported except to any of the embargoed countries in the EAR E1 country list. 26 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 27 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Appendix A. Notices Wireless related information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Wireless interoperability Wireless LAN PCI Express Mini Card is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS), Complementary Code Keying (CCK), and/or Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) radio technology, and is compliant to:

The IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n Standard on Wireless LANs, as defined and approved by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.

The Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) certification as defined by the Wi-Fi Alliance. Bluetooth Daughter Card is designed to be interoperable with any Bluetooth product that is compliant to Bluetooth Specification 2.1 + EDR as defined by the Bluetooth SIG. Following profiles are supported by Bluetooth Daughter Card:

Generic Access

Service Discovery

Serial Port

Dial-up Networking

FAX

LAN Access using PPP

Personal Area Network

Generic Object Exchange

Generic Object Push

File Transfer

Synchronization

Audio Gateway

Headset

Printer

Human Interface Devices (Keyboard/Mouse)

Basic Image

Handsfree

AV 27 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 28 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Appendix A. Notices

Usage environment and your health Wireless LAN PCI Express Mini Card and Bluetooth Daughter Card emit radio frequency electromagnetic energy like other radio devices. However, the level of energy emitted is far much less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for example mobile phones. Due to the fact that wireless LAN PCI Express Mini Card and Bluetooth Daughter Card operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, Lenovo believes the integrated wireless cards are safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situation or environment, the use of wireless LAN PCI Express Mini Card or Bluetooth Daughter Card may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the organization. These situations may for example include:

Using the integrated wireless cards on board of airplanes, or in hospitals

In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless devices in a specific organization (e.g., airport or hospital), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use wireless LAN PCI Express Mini Card or Bluetooth Daughter Card prior to turning on the computer.

Safety information related to Mobile Broadband 1 Do not use the Mobile Broadband feature on your computer in highly flammable areas (e.g. gas station) or near blasting. Though it is rare, the Mobile Broadband module, like other cellular network devices, could generate a spark. 2 Avoid using Mobile Broadband feature outdoors during a thunderstorm. 28 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 29 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Appendix A. Notices 3 Use of mobile devices on board aircraft is explicitly prohibited by many airlines companies, especially during take-off and landing. The built-in Mobile Broadband module on your computer is a low-power radio transceiver. When it is turned on, it intermittently receives and transmits radio frequency (RF) energy which could cause interference with the operation of the airplane communication or navigation system. Refer to rules or regulations of your airline company for Mobile Broadband use. Never enable Mobile Broadband feature on your computer unless you are explicitly permitted to do so. 4 Follow restrictions when using your computer in hospitals. Some equipments in hospitals are sophisticated and are susceptible to electromagnetic interference. Do not enable Mobile Broadband feature near medical equipment without requesting permission. 5 The Mobile Broadband communication may affect the operation of implanted cardiac pacemakers and other medically implanted equipment. Patients with cardiac pacemakers should be well aware that use of Mobile Broadband feature on this computer may cause the implanted device to malfunction. If patients have any doubt that there is interference taking place, immediately disable the wireless radio on the computer and contact the doctor for more information. 6 The Mobile Broadband module embedded in your computer does not support voice calls, hence their use for essential communications is not possible. Therefore you should never rely upon the device for essential communications. 29 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 30 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Appendix A. Notices TV tuner information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Products with television tuner options installed The notice below applies to products containing television (TV) tuner devices that connect to external antennas or to cable/CATV systems, or both, and that are intended to be installed in North America. Users and installers in other countries should follow local codes and ordinances when installing appliances that connect to external antennas and cable/CATV systems. If local codes are not applicable, it is recommended that users/

installers follow guidelines similar to those that follow. The TV tuner should connect to TNV-1 circuit only. When install the coaxial cable to the TV tuner should make sure its metal shield is reliable connected to protective earthing system of the building.

Note to CATV system installer This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installers attention to Article 820-40 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close as possible to the point of cable entry as practical. 30 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 31 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Appendix A. Notices

Example of antenna grounding a b c g f e d a b c d e f g Ground clamp Antenna lead-in wire Antenna discharge unit (NEC Section 810-20) Grounding conductors (NEC Section 810-21) Power service grounding electrode system (NEC Article 250, Part H) Ground clamps Electronic service equipment The following notice applies to all countries and regions:



Danger:

Outdoor antenna grounding If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the equipment, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Lightning For added protection for this equipment during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and power line surges. 31 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 32 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Appendix A. Notices

Power lines An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits, as contact with them may be fatal.

Risk of hazard connecting Class I equipment to cable distribution networks For Class l equipment in Norway, intended to be connected to cable distribution systems, the screen of a coaxial cable is required to be galvanic isolated from the protective earth.

Connection to a Cable Distribution System is to be provided through a galvanic isolator.

M Kun tilkoples kabel-TV nett via galvanisk isolator. 32 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 33 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Appendix A. Notices WEEE and recycling statements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

General recycling statement Lenovo encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Lenovo offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products. Information on product recycling offerings can be found on Lenovos Internet site at http://www.lenovo.com/recycling

Turkish statement of compliance The Lenovo product meets the requirements of the Republic of Turkey Directive on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE). Bu Lenovo rn, T.C. evre ve Orman Bakanlnn Elektrik ve Elektronik Eyalarda Baz Zararl Maddelerin Kullanmnn Snrlandrlmasna Dair Ynetmelik (EEE) direktiflerine uygundur. EEE Ynetmeliine Uygundur.

Declaraes de Reciclagem no Brasil Descarte de um Produto Lenovo Fora de Uso Equipamentos eltricos e eletrnicos no devem ser descartados em lixo comum, mas enviados pontos de coleta, autorizados pelo fabricante do produto para que sejam encaminhados e processados por empresas especializadas no manuseio de resduos industriais, devidamente certificadas pelos orgos ambientais, de acordo com a legislao local. A Lenovo possui um canal especfico para auxili-lo no descarte desses produtos. Caso voc possua um produto Lenovo em situao de descarte, ligue para o nosso SAC ou encaminhe um e-mail para: reciclar@lenovo.com, informando o modelo, nmero de srie e cidade, a fim de enviarmos as instrues para o correto descarte do seu produto Lenovo. 33 Safety and General Information Guide Appendix - A.fm Page 34 Wednesday, August 3, 2011 3:39 PM Appendix A. Notices

EU WEEE statements The Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU) and Norway. Appliances are labeled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive determines the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various products to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive. Users of electrical and electronic equipment (EEE) with the WEEE marking per Annex IV of the WEEE Directive must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to them for the return, recycle, recovery of WEEE and minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to the presence of hazardous substances. For additional WEEE information go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/recycling.

Battery recycling marks 34 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 35 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Appendix A. Notices Japan recycling statements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Collecting and recycling a disused Lenovo computer or monitor If you are a company employee and need to dispose of a Lenovo computer or monitor that is the property of the company, you must do so in accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources. Computers and monitors are categorized as industrial waste and should be properly disposed of by an industrial waste disposal contractor certified by a local government. In accordance with the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, Lenovo Japan provides, through its PC Collecting and Recycling Services, for the collecting, reuse, and recycling of disused computers and monitors. For details, go to:

http://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan Pursuant to the Law for Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources, the collecting and recycling of home-used computers and monitors by the manufacturer was begun on October 1, 2003. This service is provided free of charge for home-used computers sold after October 1, 2003. For details, go to: http://www.lenovo.com/recycling/japan 35 Safety and General Information Guide Appendix - A.fm Page 36 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 5:00 PM Appendix A. Notices

Disposing of a Lenovo computer components Some Lenovo computer products sold in Japan may have components that contain heavy metals or other environmental sensitive substances. To properly dispose of disused components, such as a printed circuit board or drive, use the methods described above for collecting and recycling a disused computer or monitor.

Disposing a disused battery pack from Lenovo notebook computers Your Lenovo notebook computer has a lithium ion battery pack or a nickel metal hydride battery pack. If you are a company employee who uses a Lenovo notebook computer and need to dispose of a battery pack, contact the proper person in Lenovo sales, service, or marketing, and follow that persons instructions. You also can refer to the instructions at http://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/. If you use a Lenovo notebook computer at home and need to dispose of a battery pack, you must comply with local ordinances and regulations. You also can refer to the instructions at http://www.lenovo.com/jp/ja/environment/recycle/battery/. 36 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 37 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Appendix A. Notices Notice for users in the U.S.A. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

California Perchlorate Information:

Products containing CR (manganese dioxide) lithium coin cell batteries may contain perchlorate. Perchlorate Material special handling may apply. See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Japanese VCCI Class B Statement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Japan compliance statement for power line harmonics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

A statement of compliance to the IEC 61000-3-2 harmonics standard is required for all products connecting to the power mains and rated less than 20A per phase. 37 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 38 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Appendix A. Notices Korea Class B - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Ukraine RoHS - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

,

, . 38 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 39 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Appendix A. Notices Notice on deleting data from your hard disk - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

As computers spread into every corner of life, they process more and more information. The data on your computer, some of it sensitive, is stored on a storage device called the hard disk. Before you dispose of, sell, or hand over your computer, you need to delete that data. Handing your computer over to someone else without deleting the loaded software, such as operating systems and application software, may even violate License Agreements. You are advised to check the terms and conditions of those Agreements. Deleting the data from the hard disk is not easy. There are methods that seem to delete the data:

Move the data to the recycle bin, and then choose the Empty recycle bin command.

Use the Delete command.

Format your hard disk, using the software for initializing it.

Using the preinstalled recovery program, bring the hard disk back to factory-ship state. These operations, however, only change the file allocation of the data; they do not delete the data itself. In other words, the data retrieval processing is disabled under an operating system such as Windows. The data is still there, even though it seems to be lost. Thus, it is sometimes possible to read the data by use of special software for data recovery. There is a risk that people of bad faith may read and misuse the critical data on hard disks for unexpected purposes. To prevent the leakage of data, it becomes very important that you take responsibility for deleting all the data from the hard disk when you dispose of, sell, or hand over your computer. You can destroy the data physically by smashing the hard disk with a hammer, or magnetically by means of strong magnetic power, thus making the data unreadable. But we recommend that you make use of the software (payware) or service (pay service) specifically developed for the purpose. 39 Safety and General Information Guide V1.0_en.book Page 40 Tuesday, August 2, 2011 3:04 PM Trademarks Lenovo is the trademark of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, products, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others. 40

User Guide Product notice Software terms This guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions of Windows. This computer may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows functionality. Go to http://www.microsoft.com for details. To access the latest user guide, go to http://www.hp.com/support, and select your country. Select Drivers & Downloads, and then follow the on-screen instructions. By installing, copying, downloading, or otherwise using any software product preinstalled on this computer, you agree to be bound by the terms of the HP End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do not accept these license terms, your sole remedy is to return the entire unused product (hardware and software) within 14 days for a full refund, subject to the refund policy of your seller. For any further information or to request a full refund of the price of the computer, please contact your seller. Copyright 2014 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel, Celeron, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are U.S. registered trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. First Edition: September 2014 Document Part Number: 795063-xx1 Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the computer, do not place the computer directly on your lap or obstruct the computer air vents. Use the computer only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to come into contact with the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The computer and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950-1). iii iv Safety warning notice Processor configuration setting (select models only) IMPORTANT: Select computer models are configured with an Intel Pentium N35xx series or a Celeron N28xx/N29xx series processor and a Windows operating system. If your computer is configured as described, do not change the processor configuration setting in msconfig.exe from 4 or 2 processors to 1 processor. If you do so, your computer will not restart. You will have to perform a factory reset to restore the original settings. v vi Processor configuration setting (select models only) Table of contents 1 Starting right ...................................................................................................................................................... 1 Visit the HP Apps Store ........................................................................................................................ 1 Best practices ....................................................................................................................................... 1 More HP resources .............................................................................................................................. 2 2 Getting to know your computer ......................................................................................................................... 4 Locating hardware ................................................................................................................................ 4 Locating software ................................................................................................................................. 4 Identifying components ........................................................................................................................ 5 Using the action keys ......................................................................................................................... 11 Labels ................................................................................................................................................. 12 3 Connecting to a network ................................................................................................................................. 14 Connecting to a wireless network ....................................................................................................... 14 Using the wireless controls ................................................................................................ 14 Wireless button ................................................................................................. 14 Operating system controls ................................................................................ 15 Connecting to a WLAN ...................................................................................................... 15 Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) ............................................................ 16 Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) ..................................................... 16 Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select models only) ............................................................... 16 Sharing data and drives and accessing software ............................................................................... 17 Sharing media and data across your home group network (select models only) ............................... 17 4 Enjoying entertainment features ..................................................................................................................... 19 Using a webcam (select models only) ................................................................................................ 19 Using audio ........................................................................................................................................ 19 Connecting speakers ......................................................................................................... 19 Connecting headphones .................................................................................................... 19 Connecting a microphone .................................................................................................. 20 Connecting headsets ......................................................................................................... 20 Using Beats Audio (select models only) ............................................................................ 20 Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel ............................................................... 20 Enabling and disabling Beats Audio .................................................................. 20 Using video ......................................................................................................................................... 20 Connecting video devices by using a VGA cable (select models only) ............................. 21 vii Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select models only) .............................. 21 Setting up HDMI audio ...................................................................................... 22 Connecting digital display devices using a DisplayPort cable (select models only) .......... 23 Connecting Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select models only) .......................... 23 5 Navigating the screen ..................................................................................................................................... 24 Using the TouchPad and touch screen gestures ............................................................................... 24 Tap ..................................................................................................................................... 24 Two-finger scroll ................................................................................................................ 24 Two-finger pinch zoom ...................................................................................................... 25 Two-finger click .................................................................................................................. 25 Right-edge swipe ............................................................................................................... 25 Left-edge swipe ................................................................................................................. 26 Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe ........................................................................... 26 One-finger slide (touch screen only) .................................................................................. 26 Using a keyboard and optional mouse ............................................................................................... 27 6 Managing power ............................................................................................................................................. 28 Initiating and exiting Sleep and Hibernation ....................................................................................... 28 Manually initiating and exiting Sleep .................................................................................. 29 Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) ....................................... 29 Setting password protection on wakeup (exiting Sleep or Hibernation) ............................ 29 Using the power meter and power settings ........................................................................................ 30 Running on battery power .................................................................................................................. 30 Factory-sealed battery (select models only) ...................................................................... 30 User-replaceable battery (select models only) .................................................................. 31 Finding battery information ................................................................................................ 31 Conserving battery power .................................................................................................. 32 Resolving a low battery level ............................................................................................. 32 Resolving a low battery level when external power is available ........................ 32 Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available ..................... 32 Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation ....... 32 Storing a user-replaceable battery (select models only) .................................................... 32 Disposing of a user-replaceable battery (select models only) ........................................... 33 Running on AC power ........................................................................................................................ 33 Troubleshooting power problems ...................................................................................... 33 Shutting down (turning off) the computer ........................................................................................... 34 7 Maintaining your computer .............................................................................................................................. 36 Improving performance ...................................................................................................................... 36 viii Using Disk Defragmenter ................................................................................................... 36 Using Disk Cleanup ........................................................................................................... 36 Updating programs and drivers .......................................................................................................... 36 Cleaning your computer ..................................................................................................................... 37 Cleaning procedures .......................................................................................................... 37 Cleaning the display .......................................................................................... 37 Cleaning the sides or cover ............................................................................... 38 Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select models only) .................. 38 Traveling with or shipping your computer ........................................................................................... 38 8 Securing your computer and information ........................................................................................................ 40 Using passwords ................................................................................................................................ 40 Setting Windows passwords .............................................................................................. 40 Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords ............................................................................. 41 Using the fingerprint reader (select models only) ............................................................................... 41 Using Internet security software ......................................................................................................... 42 Using antivirus software ..................................................................................................... 42 Using firewall software ....................................................................................................... 42 Installing software updates ................................................................................................................. 43 Installing critical security updates ....................................................................................................... 43 Securing your wireless network .......................................................................................................... 43 Backing up your software applications and information ..................................................................... 43 Using an optional security cable lock ................................................................................................. 43 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................................... 45 Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) ............................................................................................................... 45 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 45 Determining the BIOS version ........................................................................................... 45 Downloading a BIOS update ............................................................................................. 46 Synchronizing a tablet and keyboard (select models only) ................................................................ 47 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ................................................................................................. 48 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device ................................................ 48 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering .......................................................................................................... 50 Creating recovery media and backups ............................................................................................... 50 Creating HP Recovery media (select models only) ........................................................... 50 Using Windows tools .......................................................................................................................... 51 Restore and recovery ......................................................................................................................... 51 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager .......................................................................... 52 ix What you need to know before you get started ................................................. 52 Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) ...................................... 53 Using HP Recovery media to recover ............................................................... 53 Changing the computer boot order ................................................................... 54 Removing the HP Recovery partition (select models only) ............................... 54 12 Specifications ................................................................................................................................................ 55 Input power ......................................................................................................................................... 55 Operating environment ....................................................................................................................... 55 13 Electrostatic Discharge ................................................................................................................................. 57 Index ................................................................................................................................................................... 58 x 1 Starting right This computer is a powerful tool designed to enhance your work and entertainment. Read this chapter to learn about best practices after you set up your computer and about where to find additional HP resources. Visit the HP Apps Store The HP Apps Store offers a wide choice of popular games, entertainment and music apps, productivity apps, and apps exclusive to HP that you can download to the Start screen. The selection is updated regularly and includes regional content and country-specific offers. Be sure to check the HP Apps Store frequently for new and updated features. IMPORTANT: You must be connected to the Internet to access the HP Apps Store. To view and download an app:

1. 2. From the Start screen, select the Store app. Select HP picks to view all the available apps. NOTE: HP picks is available in select countries only. 3. Select the app you want to download, and then follow the on-screen instructions. When the download is complete, the app appears on the All apps screen. Best practices After you set up and register the computer, we recommend the following steps to get the most out of your smart investment:

Back up your hard drive by creating recovery media. See Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 50. If you havent already done so, connect to a wired or wireless network. See details in Connecting to a network on page 14. Become familiar with the computer hardware and software. For more information, see Getting to know your computer on page 4 and Enjoying entertainment features on page 19. Update or purchase antivirus software. See Using antivirus software on page 42. Visit the HP Apps Store 1 More HP resources To locate resources that provide product details, how-to information, and more, use this table. Resource Setup Instructions Help and Support To access Help and Support:

From the Start screen, type help, and then from the Search window, select Help and Support. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/

contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Worldwide support To get support in your language, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/

wwcontact_us.html. Safety & Comfort Guide To access this guide:

1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Select My computer, and then select User guides. or Go to http://www.hp.com/ergo. Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices To access this document:

1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Select My computer, and then select User guides. Limited Warranty*

To access this document:

1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or Contents Overview of computer setup and features A broad range of how-to information and troubleshooting tips Online chat with an HP technician Support telephone numbers HP service center locations Proper workstation setup Guidelines for posture and work habits that increase your comfort and decrease your risk of injury Electrical and mechanical safety information Important regulatory notices, including information about proper battery disposal Specific warranty information about this computer 2 Chapter 1 Starting right Resource Contents From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Select My computer, and then select Warranty and services. or Go to http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments.

*You can find the expressly provided HP Limited Warranty applicable to your product located with the user guides on your computer and/or on the CD/DVD provided in the box. In some countries/regions, HP may provide a printed HP Limited Warranty in the box. For countries/regions where the warranty is not provided in printed format, you may request a printed copy from http://www.hp.com/go/orderdocuments or write to:

North America: Hewlett-Packard, MS POD, 11311 Chinden Blvd., Boise, ID 83714, USA Europe, Middle East, Africa: Hewlett-Packard, POD, Via G. Di Vittorio, 9, 20063, Cernusco s/Naviglio (MI), Italy Asia Pacific: Hewlett-Packard, POD, P.O. Box 200, Alexandra Post Office, Singapore 911507 When you request a printed copy of your warranty, please include your product number, warranty period (found on your service label), name, and postal address. IMPORTANT: Do NOT return your HP product to the addresses above. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/go/

contactHP. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact_us.html. More HP resources 3 2 Getting to know your computer Locating hardware To find out what hardware is installed on your computer:

1. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, select System, and then click Device Manager in the left column. A list displays all the devices installed on your computer. 2. For information about system hardware components and the system BIOS version number, press fn

+esc (select models only). Locating software To find out what software is installed on your computer:

From the Start screen, click the down arrow in the lower-left corner of the screen. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then select Programs and Features. 4 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Identifying components Depending on the model, your computer may have some of the following components. To see which components are specific to your model, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. Component Description AC adapter light On: The AC adapter is connected and the battery is charged. Off: The computer is using battery power. or White: The computer is connected to external power and the battery is charged from 90 to 99 percent. Amber: The computer is connected to external power and the battery is charged from 0 to 90 percent. Blinking amber: A battery that is the only available power source has reached a low battery level. When the battery reaches a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. Off: The battery is fully charged. Accessory battery connector Connects an optional accessory battery. Action keys Execute frequently used system functions. Airplane mode key (also referred to as the wireless button) NOTE: On select models, the f5 action key turns the radiance backlight keyboard (also known as keyboard backlight) feature off or on. Turns the airplane mode and wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Audio-in (microphone) jack Connects an optional computer headset microphone, stereo array microphone, or monaural microphone. Audio-out (headphone) jack Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before using headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: When a device is connected to a headphone jack, the computer speakers are disabled. Identifying components 5 Component Description Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in

(microphone) jack Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this document:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. NOTE: Be sure that the device cable has a 4-conductor connector that supports both audio-out (headphone) and audio-in (microphone). Battery bay Battery lock Holds the battery. Locks the battery in the battery bay. Battery release latch Releases the battery. Bluetooth compartment Contains a Bluetooth device. Caps lock light DisplayPort On: Caps lock is on, which switches the keys to all capital letters. Connects an optional digital display device, such as a high-

performance monitor or projector. Docking connector Connects an optional docking device. esc key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. External monitor port Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. Fingerprint reader fn key Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with the esc key, or on select models, the b key or the spacebar. 6 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component Description Hard drive light HDMI port Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed. Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive. Connects an optional video or audio device, such as a high-

definition television, any compatible digital or audio component, or a high-speed High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) device. HP Triple Bass Reflex Subwoofer Provides superior bass sound. Integrated numeric keypad Internal display switch Internal microphones Left control zone Left TouchPad button Memory card reader Mute light num lock key Optical drive Power button When num lock is on, it can be used like an external numeric keypad. Turns off the display and initiates Sleep if the display is closed while the power is on. NOTE: The internal display switch is not visible from the outside of the computer. Record sound. Textured area that allows you to perform additional gestures. Functions like the left button on an external mouse. Reads optional memory cards that enable you to store, manage, share or access information. To insert a card:

Hold the card label-side up, with connectors facing the slot, insert the card into the slot, and then push in on the card until it is firmly seated. To remove a card:

Press in on the card it until it pops out. Amber: Computer sound is off. Off: Computer sound is on. Alternates between the navigational and numeric functions on the integrated numeric keypad. Depending on your computer model, reads an optical disc or reads and writes to an optical disc. NOTE: For disc compatibility information, go to the Help and Support web page (see More HP resources on page 2). Follow the web page instructions to select your computer model. Select Drivers & Downloads, and then follow the on-

screen instructions. When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. Identifying components 7 Component Description When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button will result in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and Windows shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button down for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. From the Start screen, type power, select Power and sleep settings, and then select Power and sleep from the list of applications. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then select Power Options. Connects an AC adapter. On: The computer is on. Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-

saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other components. Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power. Textured area that allows you to perform additional gestures. Power connector Power light Right control zone Right TouchPad button Functions like the right button on an external mouse. RJ-45 (network) jack/status lights Connects a network cable. White: The network is connected. Amber: Activity is occurring on the network. Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. Service door NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Provides access to the hard drive bay, the wireless local area network (WLAN) module slot, the wireless wide area network (WWAN) module slot, and the memory module slots. 8 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component Description CAUTION: To prevent an unresponsive system, replace the wireless module only with a wireless module authorized for use in the computer by the governmental agency that regulates wireless devices in your country or region. If you replace the module and then receive a warning message, remove the module to restore computer functionality, and then contact support through Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support.

- or -

From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Service door release latch Releases the service door. SIM slot Speakers TouchPad light TouchPad zone USB 2.0 charging (powered) port USB 2.0 port USB 3.0 charging (powered) port USB 3.0 port Vents Supports a wireless subscriber identity module (SIM). The SIM slot is located inside the battery bay. Produce sound. On: The TouchPad is off. Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. NOTE: The TouchPad also supports edge-swipe gestures. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Standard USB ports will not charge all USB devices or will charge using a low current. Some USB devices require power and require you to use a powered port. NOTE: USB charging ports can also charge select models of cell phones and MP3 players, even when the computer is off. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Standard USB ports will not charge all USB devices or will charge using a low current. Some USB devices require power and require you to use a powered port. NOTE: USB charging ports can also charge select models of cell phones and MP3 players, even when the computer is off. Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Enable airflow to cool internal components. Identifying components 9 Component Description Webcam NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. The number of vents varies depending on the computer model. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To use the webcam:

From the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. or From the Windows desktop, click the Start button, click All Programs to find your webcam software. Webcam light On: The webcam is in use. Windows application key Displays options for a selected object. Windows key Wireless light WLAN antennas WWAN antennas Returns you to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will return you to the previous screen. On: An integrated wireless device, such as a WLAN device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with WLANs. NOTE: The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this document:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with WWANs. 10 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component Description NOTE: The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this document:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Using the action keys Depending on the model, your computer may have the function key features as described in this table. An action key performs an assigned function. The icon on each of the action keys illustrates the assigned function for that key. To use an action key function, press and hold the key. CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. NOTE: The action key feature is enabled at the factory. You can disable this feature in Setup Utility

(BIOS). Refer to Help and Support for additional information. After you have disabled the action key feature, you can still perform each function by pressing the fn key in combination with the appropriate action key. Icon Description Opens Help and Support, which provides tutorials, information about the Windows operating system and your computer, answers to questions, and updates to your computer. Help and Support also provides automated troubleshooting tools and access to support. Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Switches the screen image between display devices connected to the system. For example, if a monitor is connected to the computer, repeatedly pressing this key alternates the screen image from the computer display to the monitor display to a simultaneous display on both the computer and the monitor. Turns the radiance backlight keyboard (also known as keyboard backlight) feature off or on. NOTE: To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Using the action keys 11 Icon Description Plays the previous track of an audio CD or the previous section of a DVD or a BD. Begins, pauses, or resumes playback of an audio CD, a DVD, or a BD. Plays the next track of an audio CD or the next section of a DVD or a BD. Stops audio or video playback of a CD, a DVD, or a BD. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Mutes or restores speaker sound. Turns the wireless feature on or off. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Turns the airplane mode and wireless feature on or off. NOTE: The airplane mode key is also referred to as the wireless button. NOTE: A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. Labels The labels affixed to the computer provide information you may need when you troubleshoot system problems or travel internationally with the computer. IMPORTANT: Check the following locations for the labels described in this section: the bottom of the computer, inside the battery bay, under the removable service door, or on the back of the display. Service labelProvides important information to identify your computer. When contacting support, you will probably be asked for the serial number, and possibly for the product number or the model number. Locate these numbers before you contact support. Your service label will resemble one of the examples shown below. Refer to the illustration that most closely matches the service label on your computer. 12 Chapter 2 Getting to know your computer Component

(1)

(2) Serial number Product number

(3) Warranty period

(4) Model number (select models only) Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity label (select models only prior to Windows 8)Contains the Windows Product Key. You may need the Product Key to update or troubleshoot the operating system. HP platforms with Windows 8 or Windows 8.x preinstalled do not have the physical label. Instead a Digital Product Key is electronically installed. NOTE: The Digital Product Key is automatically recognized and activated by Microsoft operating systems when a Windows 8 or Windows 8.x operating system is reinstalled using HP-

approved recovery methods. Regulatory label(s)Provide(s) regulatory information about the computer. Wireless certification label(s)Provide(s) information about optional wireless devices and the approval markings for the countries or regions in which the devices have been approved for use. Labels 13 3 Connecting to a network Your computer can travel with you wherever you go. But even at home, you can explore the globe and access information from millions of websites using your computer and a wired or wireless network connection. This chapter will help you get connected to that world. Connecting to a wireless network Your computer may be equipped with one or more of the following wireless devices:

WLAN deviceConnects the computer to wireless local area networks (commonly referred to as Wi-Fi networks, wireless LANs, or WLANs) in corporate offices, your home, and public places such as airports, restaurants, coffee shops, hotels, and universities. In a WLAN, the mobile wireless device in your computer communicates with a wireless router or a wireless access point. HP Mobile Broadband ModuleGives you wireless connectivity over a wireless wide area network (WWAN), a much larger area. Mobile network operators install base stations (similar to cell phone towers) throughout large geographic areas, effectively providing coverage across entire states, regions, or even countries. Bluetooth deviceCreates a personal area network (PAN) to connect to other Bluetooth-

enabled devices such as computers, phones, printers, headsets, speakers, and cameras. In a PAN, each device communicates directly with other devices, and devices must be relatively close togethertypically within 10 meters (approximately 33 feet) of each other. For more information about wireless technology, the Internet, and networking, see the information and website links provided in Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Using the wireless controls You can control the wireless devices in your computer using one or more of these features:

Wireless button or wireless key (also called the airplane mode key) (referred to in this chapter as the wireless button) Operating system controls Wireless button The computer has a wireless button, one or more wireless devices, and, on select models, one or two wireless lights. All the wireless devices on your computer are enabled at the factory. If your computer has a wireless light, the wireless light is on (white) when your computer is on. The wireless light indicates the overall power state of your wireless devices, not the status of individual devices. If the wireless light is white, at least one wireless device is on. If the wireless light is off, all wireless devices are off. 14 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. Because the wireless devices are enabled at the factory, you can use the wireless button to turn on or turn off all the wireless devices simultaneously. Operating system controls The Network and Sharing Center allows you to set up a connection or network, connect to a network, and diagnose and repair network problems. To use operating system controls:

1. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then select Control Panel. Select Network and Internet, and then select Network and Sharing Center. 2. For more information, see the information provided in Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Connecting to a WLAN To connect to a WLAN, follow these steps:

1. Be sure that the WLAN device is on. On select models, if the device is on, the wireless light is white. If the wireless light is off, press the wireless button. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. 2. From the Start screen or the Windows desktop, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the display to reveal the charms. Select Settings, and then click the network status icon. Select your WLAN from the list. 3. 4. 5. Click Connect. If the WLAN is a security-enabled WLAN, you are prompted to enter a security code. Type the code, and then click Next to complete the connection. NOTE:

If no WLANs are listed, you may be out of range of a wireless router or access point. NOTE:

If you do not see the WLAN you want to connect to, from the Windows desktop, right-

click the network status icon, and then select Open Network and Sharing Center. Click Set up a new connection or network. A list of options is displayed, allowing you to manually search for and connect to a network or to create a new network connection. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection. 6. After the connection is made, place the mouse pointer over the network status icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, to verify the name and status of the connection. Connecting to a wireless network 15 NOTE: The functional range (how far your wireless signals travel) depends on WLAN implementation, router manufacturer, and interference from other electronic devices or structural barriers such as walls and floors. Using HP Mobile Broadband (select models only) HP Mobile Broadband enables your computer to use WWANs to access the Internet from more places and over larger areas than it can by using WLANs. Using HP Mobile Broadband requires a network service provider (called a mobile network operator), which in most cases is a cellular phone network operator. Coverage for HP Mobile Broadband is similar to cellular phone voice coverage. When used with a mobile network operator service, HP Mobile Broadband gives you the freedom to stay connected to the Internet, send email, or connect to your corporate network whether you are on the road or outside the range of Wi-Fi hotspots. You might need the HP Mobile Broadband Module IMEI and/or MEID number to activate mobile broadband service.The serial number is printed on a label located on the bottom of your computer. Some mobile network operators require the use of a subscriber identity module (SIM). A SIM contains basic information about you, such as a personal identification number (PIN), as well as network information. Some computers include a SIM that is preinstalled in the battery bay. If the SIM is not preinstalled, it may be included with the HP Mobile Broadband documents provided with your computer, or the mobile network operator may provide it separately from the computer. For information about HP Mobile Broadband and how to activate service with a preferred mobile network operator, see the HP Mobile Broadband documents included with your computer. Using Bluetooth wireless devices (select models only) A Bluetooth device provides short-range wireless communications that replace the physical cable connections that traditionally link electronic devices such as the following:

Computers (desktop, notebook) Phones (cellular, cordless, smartphone) Imaging devices (printer, camera) Audio devices (headset, speakers) Mouse Bluetooth devices provide peer-to-peer capability that allows you to set up a PAN of Bluetooth devices. For information about configuring and using Bluetooth devices, see the Bluetooth software Help. External keyboard Connecting to a wired networkLAN (select models only) Use a LAN connection if you want to connect the computer directly to a router in your home (instead of working wirelessly), or if you want to connect to an existing network at your office. Connecting to a LAN requires an 8-pin, RJ-45 (network) cable and a network jack on the computer. To connect the network cable, follow these steps:

1. Plug the network cable into the network jack (1) on the computer. 16 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 2. Plug the other end of the network cable into a network wall jack (2) or router. If the network cable contains noise suppression circuitry (3), which prevents NOTE:

interference from TV and radio reception, orient the circuitry end of the cable toward the computer. Sharing data and drives and accessing software When your computer is part of a network, you are not limited to using only the information that is stored in your computer. Computers connected to the network can exchange software and data with each other. For more information about sharing files, folders, or drives, see the information provided in Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. NOTE: When a disc like a DVD movie or game is copy-protected, it cannot be shared. Sharing media and data across your home group network

(select models only) Use sMedio 360 software (select models only) to share media and data between the devices on your home group network. Before you can use sMedio 360, all of your computers and mobile devices must be on the same home group network and media sharing must be enabled. NOTE: For details on how to enable media sharing on additional devices, refer to the device manufacturer's instructions. 1. To set up a home group network:

From the Start screen, click the sMedio 360 app, and then click Tutorial. To enable media sharing on your computer:

2. Sharing data and drives and accessing software 17 a. From the Start screen or the Windows desktop, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the display to reveal the charms. Select Settings, and then click the network status icon. b. c. Right-click the network you are connected to, and then select the check box to turn on sharing. 18 Chapter 3 Connecting to a network 4 Enjoying entertainment features Use your HP computer as an entertainment hub to socialize via the webcam, enjoy and manage your music, and download and watch movies. Or, to make your computer an even more powerful entertainment center, connect external devices like a monitor, projector, or TV, or speakers and headphones. Using a webcam (select models only) The computer has an integrated webcam that records video and captures photographs. Some models may allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To start the webcam, from the Start screen, type camera, and then select Camera from the list of applications. For details about using the webcam, go to Help and Support. From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Using audio On your computer, or on select models using an external optical drive, you can play music CDs, download and listen to music, stream audio content from the web (including radio), record audio, or mix audio and video to create multimedia. To enhance your listening enjoyment, attach external audio devices such as speakers or headphones. Connecting speakers You can attach wired speakers to your computer by connecting them to a USB port or to the audio-

out (headphone) jack on your computer or on a docking station. To connect wireless speakers to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. To connect high-definition speakers to the computer, see Setting up HDMI audio on page 22. Before connecting speakers, lower the volume setting. Connecting headphones WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. You can connect wired headphones to the headphone jack or to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) combo jack on your computer. To connect wireless headphones to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using a webcam (select models only) 19 Connecting a microphone To record audio, connect a microphone to the microphone jack on the computer. For best results when recording, speak directly into the microphone and record sound in a setting free of background noise. Connecting headsets WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, lower the volume setting before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, see the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices. To access this document, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. Headphones combined with a microphone are called headsets. You can connect wired headsets to the audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) jack on your computer. To connect wireless headsets to your computer, follow the device manufacturer's instructions. Using Beats Audio (select models only) Beats Audio is an enhanced audio feature that provides a deep, controlled bass while maintaining a clear sound. You can experience Beats Audio through the computer's internal speakers, through external speakers connected to a USB port, or through Beats Audio headphones connected to the headphone jack. Accessing Beats Audio Control Panel Use Beats Audio Control Panel to view and manually control audio and bass settings. 1. From the Start screen, type control panel, select Control Panel, select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then select Control Panel. Select Hardware and Sound, and then select Beats Audio Control Panel. 2. Enabling and disabling Beats Audio To enable or disable Beats Audio, press the fn key in combination with the b key. Using video Your computer is a powerful video device that enables you to watch streaming video from your favorite websites and download video and movies to watch on your computer when you are not connected to a network. To enhance your viewing enjoyment, use one of the video ports on the computer to connect an external monitor, projector, or TV. IMPORTANT: Be sure that the external device is connected to the correct port on the computer, using the correct cable. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions. For information on using your video features, refer to Help and Support. 20 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Connecting video devices by using a VGA cable (select models only) NOTE: To connect a VGA video device to your computer, you need an VGA cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on an external VGA monitor or projected for a presentation, connect a monitor or projector to the computer's VGA port. 1. Connect the VGA cable from the monitor or projector to the VGA port on the computer as shown. 2. Press f4 to alternate the screen image between 4 display states:

PC Screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE: For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution. Connecting video devices using an HDMI cable (select models only) NOTE: To connect an HDMI device to your computer, you need an HDMI cable, purchased separately. To see the computer screen image on a high-definition TV or monitor, connect the high-definition device according to the following instructions:

1. Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the computer. Using video 21 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the high-definition TV or monitor. 3. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE: For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution. Setting up HDMI audio HDMI is the only video interface that supports high-definition video and audio. After you connect an HDMI TV to the computer, you can then turn on HDMI audio by following these steps:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then select Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, select the name of the digital output device. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. To return the audio stream to the computer speakers:

1. From the Windows desktop, right-click the Speakers icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar, and then click Playback devices. 2. On the Playback tab, click Speakers. 3. Click Set Default, and then click OK. 22 Chapter 4 Enjoying entertainment features Connecting digital display devices using a DisplayPort cable (select models only) NOTE: To connect a digital display device to your computer, you need a DisplayPort (DP-DP) cable, purchased separately. The DisplayPort connects a digital display device such as a high-performance monitor or projector. The DisplayPort delivers higher performance than the VGA external monitor port and improves digital connectivity. 1. Connect one end of the DisplayPort cable to the DisplayPort on the computer. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the digital display device. 3. Press f4 to alternate the computer screen image between 4 display states:

PC screen only: View the screen image on the computer only. Duplicate: View the same screen image simultaneously on both the computer and the external device. Extend: View the screen image extended across the computer and the external device. Second screen only: View the screen image on the external device only. Each time you press f4, the display state changes. NOTE: For best results, especially if you choose the "Extend" option, increase the screen resolution of the external device, as follows. From the Start screen, type control panel, and then select Control Panel. Select Appearance and Personalization. Under Display, select Adjust screen resolution. Connecting Miracast-compatible wireless displays (select models only) To discover and connect to Miracast-compatible wireless displays, follow the steps below. To open Miracast:

Point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the Start screen or the Windows desktop to display the charms, click Devices, click Project, and then follow the on-screen instructions. or On select computer models, from the Start screen, click the HP Quick Access to Miracast icon, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using video 23 5 Navigating the screen To quickly return to the Start screen, press the Windows key on a keyboard or the Windows button on a tablet. You can navigate the computer screen in the following ways:

Touch gestures Keyboard and optional mouse (purchased separately) NOTE: An external USB mouse (purchased separately) can be connected to a USB ports on the computer. Using the TouchPad and touch screen gestures The TouchPad helps you navigate the computer screen and control the pointer using simple touch gestures. To navigate the touchscreen, you can use the left and right TouchPad buttons as you would use the corresponding buttons on an external mouse. You can also customize gestures and view demonstrations of how they work. From the Start screen, type control panel, select Control Panel, and then select Hardware and Sound. Under Devices and Printers, select Mouse. NOTE: Most of the gestures shown here can be used on either the TouchPad or touchscreen. TouchPad gestures are not supported in all apps. Tap Use the tap/double-tap gesture to select or open an item on the screen. Point to an item on the screen, and then tap one finger on the TouchPad zone select it. Double-

tap an item to open it. Two-finger scroll Use the two-finger scroll gesture to move up, down, or sideways on a page or image. Place two fingers slightly apart on the TouchPad zone and then drag them up, down, left, or right. 24 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Two-finger pinch zoom Use the two-finger pinch zoom to zoom out or in on images or text. Zoom out by placing two fingers apart on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers together. Zoom in by placing two fingers together on the TouchPad zone and then moving your fingers apart. Two-finger click Use the two-finger click gesture to open the menu for an object on the screen. NOTE: The two-finger click performs the same function as right-clicking with the mouse. Place two fingers on the TouchPad zone and press down to open the options menu for the selected object. Right-edge swipe Use the right-edge swipe to reveal the charms, which let you search, share, start apps, access devices, or change settings. Gently swipe your finger inward from the right edge of the TouchPad to reveal the charms. Using the TouchPad and touch screen gestures 25 Left-edge swipe Use the left-edge swipe to reveal your open apps so that you can access them quickly. Gently swipe your finger inward from the left edge of the TouchPad to switch between apps. Without lifting your finger, swipe back toward the left edge to reveal all open apps. Top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe Use the top-edge swipe or bottom-edge swipe to display command options that allow you to customize an open app. IMPORTANT: When an app is open, the top-edge swipe varies depending on the app. Gently swipe your finger from the top edge or the bottom edge to reveal the app command options. One-finger slide (touch screen only) Use the one-finger slide to pan or scroll through lists and pages, or to move an object. To scroll across the screen, lightly slide one finger across the screen in the direction you want to move. To drag, press and hold an object, and then drag the object to move it. 26 Chapter 5 Navigating the screen Using a keyboard and optional mouse A keyboard and optional external mouse allow you to type, select items, scroll, and perform similar functions as you do touch gestures. For details, refer to Getting to know your computer on page 4. TIP: The Windows key on a tablet allow you to quickly return to the Start screen from an open app or the Windows desktop. Press the button or key again to return to the previous screen. on a keyboard or the Windows button Using a keyboard and optional mouse 27 6 Managing power Your computer can operate on either battery power or external power. When the computer is running on battery power only and an AC power source is not available to charge the battery, it is important to monitor and conserve the battery charge. Initiating and exiting Sleep and Hibernation Windows has two power-saving states, Sleep and Hibernation. SleepThe Sleep state is automatically initiated after a period of inactivity. Your work is saved to memory, allowing you to resume your work very quickly. You can also initiate Sleep manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Sleep on page 29. HibernationThe Hibernation state is automatically initiated if the battery reaches a critical level. In the Hibernation state, your work is saved to a hibernation file and the computer powers down. You can also initiate Hibernation manually. For more information, see Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) on page 29. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of possible audio and video degradation, loss of audio or video playback functionality, or loss of information, do not initiate the Sleep state while reading from or writing to a disc or an external media card. NOTE: You cannot initiate any type of networking connection or perform any computer functions while the computer is in the Sleep state or in the Hibernation state. 28 Chapter 6 Managing power Manually initiating and exiting Sleep You can initiate Sleep in any of the following ways:

Close the display. From the Start screen or the Windows desktop, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Sleep. You can exit Sleep in any of the following ways:

Briefly press the power button. If the computer is closed, raise the display. Press a key on the keyboard. Tap or swipe the TouchPad. When the computer exits Sleep, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Sleep, you must enter your Windows Manually initiating and exiting Hibernation (select models only) You can enable user-initiated Hibernation and change other power settings and timeouts using Power Options. 1. From the Start screen, type power options, and then select Power options. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then click Power Options. In the left pane, click Choose what the power button does. In the When I press the power button area, select Hibernate. 2. 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. 5. Click Save changes. To exit Hibernation:

Briefly press the power button. When the computer exits Hibernation, the power lights turn on and your work returns to the screen. NOTE:

Windows password before your work returns to the screen. If you have set a password to be required on exiting Hibernation, you must enter your Setting password protection on wakeup (exiting Sleep or Hibernation) To set the computer to prompt for a password when the computer exits Sleep or Hibernation, follow these steps:

1. From the Start screen, type power options, and then select Power options. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then click Power Options. In the left pane, click Require a password on wakeup. 2. Initiating and exiting Sleep and Hibernation 29 3. Click Change Settings that are currently unavailable. 4. Click Require a password (recommended). NOTE:

If you need to create a user account password or change your current user account password, click Create or change your user account password, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you do not need to create or change a user account password, go to step 5. 5. Click Save changes. Using the power meter and power settings The power meter is located on the Windows desktop. The power meter allows you to quickly access power settings and view the remaining battery charge. To view the percentage of remaining battery charge and the current power plan, place the mouse pointer over the power meter icon. To use Power Options, click the power meter icon and select an item from the list. From the Start screen, you can also type power options, and then select Power Options. Different power meter icons indicate whether the computer is running on battery or external power. Placing the mouse pointer over the icon reveals a message if the battery has reached a low or critical battery level. Running on battery power When a charged battery is in the computer and the computer is not plugged into external power, the computer runs on battery power. When the computer is off and unplugged from external power, the battery in the computer slowly discharges. The computer will display a message when the battery reaches a low or critical battery level. Computer battery life varies, depending on power management settings, programs running on the computer, screen brightness, external devices connected to the computer, and other factors. Factory-sealed battery (select models only) To monitor the status of the battery, or if the battery is no longer holding a charge, run Battery Check in the HP Support Assistant app. 1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Select Battery and performance. If Battery Check indicates that your battery should be replaced, contact support. 2. The battery(ies) in this product cannot be easily replaced by users themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. The battery[ies] in this product cannot be easily replaced by user themselves. Removing or replacing the battery could affect your warranty coverage. If a battery is no longer holding a charge, contact support. When a battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. 30 Chapter 6 Managing power User-replaceable battery (select models only) WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the user-replaceable battery provided with the computer, a replacement battery provided by HP, or a compatible battery purchased from HP. CAUTION: Removing a user-replaceable battery that is the sole power source for the computer can cause loss of information. To prevent loss of information, save your work or shut down the computer through Windows before removing the battery. To remove the user-replaceable battery (select models only), refer to the steps and illustration that most closely match your computer:

1. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. Slide the battery release latch (1) to release the battery. NOTE: The battery release latch automatically returns to its original position. 3. Remove the battery from the computer (2). or 1. 2. Turn the computer upside down on a flat surface. Slide the battery release latch (1) to release the battery. NOTE: The battery release latch automatically returns to its original position. 3. Pivot the battery upward (2), and then remove it from the computer (3). Finding battery information To access battery information:

1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Select Battery and Performance. 2. Running on battery power 31 HP Support Assistant provides the following tools and information about the battery:

Battery Check Information about battery types, specifications, life cycles, and capacity Conserving battery power To conserve battery power and maximize battery life:

Lower the brightness of the display. Select the Power saver setting in Power Options. If the computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the user-replaceable battery from the computer and store it separately in a cool, dry place. Turn off wireless devices when you are not using them. Disconnect unused external devices that are not plugged into an external power source, such as an external hard drive connected to a USB port. Stop, disable, or remove any external media cards that you are not using. Before you leave your work, initiate Sleep or shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level Resolving a low battery level when external power is available Connect one of the following to the computer and to external power:

AC adapter Optional docking or expansion device Optional power adapter purchased as an accessory from HP Resolving a low battery level when no power source is available Save your work and shut down the computer. Resolving a low battery level when the computer cannot exit Hibernation 1. Replace the discharged user-replaceable battery with a charged battery, or connect the AC adapter to the computer and to external power. Exit Hibernation by pressing the power button. 2. Storing a user-replaceable battery (select models only) CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to a battery, do not expose it to high temperatures for extended periods of time. If a computer will be unused and unplugged from external power for more than 2 weeks, remove the battery and store it separately in a cool, dry place to prolong the battery charge. A stored battery should be checked every 6 months. If the capacity is less than 50 percent, recharge the battery before returning it to storage. 32 Chapter 6 Managing power Disposing of a user-replaceable battery (select models only) WARNING! To reduce the risk of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, or puncture; do not short external contacts; do not dispose of in fire or water. See the Regulatory, Safety and Environmental Notices for proper battery disposal. To access this document:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Running on AC power For information about connecting to AC power, refer to the Setup Instructions poster provided in the computer box. The computer does not use battery power when the computer is connected to AC power with an approved AC adapter or an optional docking/expansion device. WARNING! To reduce potential safety issues, use only the AC adapter provided with the computer, a replacement AC adapter provided by HP, or a compatible AC adapter purchased from HP. Connect the computer to AC power under any of the following conditions:

WARNING! Do not charge the computer battery while you are aboard aircraft. When charging or calibrating a battery When installing or modifying system software When writing information to a disc (select models only) When running Disk Defragmenter on computers with internal hard drives When performing a backup or recovery When you connect the computer to AC power:

The battery begins to charge. The screen brightness increases. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. When you disconnect AC power:

The computer switches to battery power. The screen brightness automatically decreases to save battery life. The power meter icon on the Windows desktop changes appearance. Troubleshooting power problems Test the AC adapter if the computer exhibits any of the following symptoms when it is connected to AC power:

Running on AC power 33 The computer does not turn on. The display does not turn on. The power lights do not turn on. To test the AC adapter:

1. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the computer, and then plug it into an AC outlet. 3. Shut down the computer. Turn on the computer. If the power lights turn on, the AC adapter is working properly. If the power lights remain off, check the connection from the AC adapter to the computer and the connection from the AC adapter to the AC outlet to be sure that the connections are secure. If the connections are secure and the power lights remain off, the AC adapter is not functioning and should be replaced. Contact support for information about obtaining a replacement AC power adapter. Shutting down (turning off) the computer CAUTION: Unsaved information is lost when the computer shuts down. Be sure to save your work before shutting down the computer. The Shut down command closes all open programs, including the operating system, and then turns off the display and computer. Shut down the computer under any of the following conditions:

When you need to replace the battery or access components inside the computer When you are connecting an external hardware device that does not connect to a USB or video port When the computer will be unused and disconnected from external power for an extended period Although you can turn off the computer with the power button, the recommended procedure is to use the Windows Shut down command. If the computer is in the Sleep state or in Hibernation, first exit Sleep or Hibernation by NOTE:

briefly pressing the power button. 1. 2. Save your work and close all open programs. From the Start screen or the Windows desktop, point to the upper-right or lower-right corner of the screen to reveal the charms. 3. Click Settings, click the Power icon, and then click Shut down. or Right-click the Start button in the lower-left corner of the screen, select Shut down or sign out, and then select Shut down. If the computer is unresponsive and you are unable to use the preceding shutdown procedures, try the following emergency procedures in the sequence provided:

34 Chapter 6 Managing power Press ctrl+alt+delete, click the Power icon, and then select Shut Down. Press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds. Disconnect the computer from external power. On models with a user-replaceable battery, remove the battery. Shutting down (turning off) the computer 35 7 Maintaining your computer It is important to perform regular maintenance to keep your computer in optimal condition. This chapter explains how to use tools like Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. It also provides instructions for updating programs and drivers, steps to clean the computer, and tips for traveling with

(or shipping) the computer. Improving performance You can improve the performance of your computer by performing regular maintenance tasks with tools such as Disk Defragmenter and Disk Cleanup. Using Disk Defragmenter HP recommends using Disk Defragmenter to defragment your hard drive at least once a month. NOTE:

It is not necessary to run Disk Defragmenter on solid-state drives. To run Disk Defragmenter:

1. Connect the computer to AC power. 2. 3. For additional information, access the Disk Defragmenter software Help. From the Start screen, type defragment, and then select Defragment and optimize your drives. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using Disk Cleanup Use Disk Cleanup to search the hard drive for unnecessary files that you can safely delete to free up disk space and help the computer run more efficiently. To run Disk Cleanup:

1. From the Start screen, type disk, and then select one of the following:

Free up disk space on this PC Uninstall apps to free up disk space Free up disk space by deleting uncessary files Follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Updating programs and drivers HP recommends that you update your programs and drivers on a regular basis. Updates can resolve issues and bring new features and options to your computer. For example, older graphics components might not work well with the most recent gaming software. Without the latest driver, you would not be getting the most out of your equipment. Go to http://www.hp.com/support to download the latest versions of HP programs and drivers. In addition, register to receive automatic notifications when updates become available. 36 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer If you would like to update your programs and drivers, follow these instructions:

1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

-or-

From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Click Updates and tune-ups, and then click Check for HP updates now. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Cleaning your computer Use the following products to safely clean your computer:

Dimethyl benzyl ammonium chloride 0.3 percent maximum concentration (for example, disposable wipes, which come in a variety of brands) Alcohol-free glass-cleaning fluid Solution of water and mild soap Dry microfiber cleaning cloth or a chamois (static-free cloth without oil) Static-free cloth wipes CAUTION: Avoid strong cleaning solvents that can permanently damage your computer. If you are not sure that a cleaning product is safe for your computer, check the product contents to make sure that ingredients such as alcohol, acetone, ammonium chloride, methylene chloride, and hydrocarbons are not included in the product. Fibrous materials, such as paper towels, can scratch the computer. Over time, dirt particles and cleaning agents can get trapped in the scratches. Cleaning procedures Follow the procedures in this section to safely clean your computer. WARNING! To prevent electric shock or damage to components, do not attempt to clean your computer while it is on. Turn off the computer. 1. 2. Disconnect AC power. 3. Disconnect all powered external devices. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not spray cleaning agents or liquids directly on any computer surface. Liquids dripped on the surface can permanently damage internal components. Cleaning the display Gently wipe the display using a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with an alcohol-free glass cleaner. Be sure that a display is dry before you close the computer. Cleaning your computer 37 Cleaning the sides or cover To clean the sides or cover, use a soft microfiber cloth or chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously, or use an acceptable disposable wipe. NOTE: When cleaning the cover of the computer, use a circular motion to aid in removing dirt and debris. Cleaning the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse (select models only) WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to internal components, do not use a vacuum cleaner attachment to clean the keyboard. A vacuum cleaner can deposit household debris on the keyboard surface. CAUTION: To prevent damage to internal components, do not allow liquids to drip between the keys. To clean the TouchPad, keyboard, or mouse, use a soft microfiber cloth or a chamois moistened with one of the cleaning solutions listed previously or use an acceptable disposable wipe. To prevent keys from sticking and to remove dust, lint, and particles from the keyboard, use a can of compressed air with a straw extension. Traveling with or shipping your computer If you have to travel with or ship your computer, follow these tips to keep your equipment safe. Prepare the computer for traveling or shipping:

Back up your information to an external drive. Remove all discs and all external media cards, such as memory cards. Turn off and then disconnect all external devices. Shut down the computer. Take along a backup of your information. Keep the backup separate from the computer. When traveling by air, carry the computer as hand luggage; do not check it in with the rest of your luggage. CAUTION: Avoid exposing a drive to magnetic fields. Security devices with magnetic fields include airport walk-through devices and security wands. Airport conveyer belts and similar security devices that check carry-on baggage use X-rays instead of magnetism and do not damage drives. If you plan to use the computer during a flight, listen for the in-flight announcement that tells you when you are allowed to use your computer. In-flight computer use is at the discretion of the airline. If you are shipping the computer or a drive, use suitable protective packaging and label the package FRAGILE. The use of wireless devices may be restricted in some environments. Such restrictions may apply aboard aircraft, in hospitals, near explosives, and in hazardous locations. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of a wireless device in your computer, ask for authorization to use your computer before you turn it on. If you are traveling internationally, follow these suggestions:

38 Chapter 7 Maintaining your computer Check the computer-related customs regulations for each country or region on your itinerary. Check the power cord and adapter requirements for each location in which you plan to use the computer. Voltage, frequency, and plug configurations vary. WARNING! To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire, or damage to the equipment, do not attempt to power the computer with a voltage converter kit sold for appliances. Traveling with or shipping your computer 39 8 Securing your computer and information Computer security is essential for protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your information. Standard security solutions provided by the Windows operating system, HP applications, the non-Windows Setup Utility (BIOS), and other third-party software can help protect your computer from a variety of risks, such as viruses, worms, and other types of malicious code. IMPORTANT: Some security features listed in this chapter may not be available on your computer. Using passwords A password is a group of characters that you choose to secure your computer information and to protect online transactions. Several types of passwords can be set. For example, when you set up your computer for the first time, you were asked to create a user password to secure your computer. Additional passwords can be set in Windows or in the HP Setup Utility (BIOS) that is preinstalled on your computer. You may find it helpful to use the same password for a Setup Utility (BIOS) feature and for a Windows security feature. To create and save passwords, use the following tips:

To reduce the risk of being locked out of the computer, record each password and store it in a secure place away from the computer. Do not store passwords in a file on the computer. When creating passwords, follow requirements set by the program. Change your passwords at least every 3 months. An ideal password is long and has letters, punctuation, symbols, and numbers. Before you send your computer for service, back up your files, delete confidential files, and then remove all password settings. For additional information about Windows passwords, such as screen-saver passwords:

From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

-or-

From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Setting Windows passwords Password User password Administrator password Function Protects access to a Windows user account. Protects administrator-level access to computer contents. NOTE: This password cannot be used to access Setup Utility (BIOS) contents. 40 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Setting Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords Password Administrator password Power-on password Function Must be entered each time you access Setup Utility

(BIOS). If you forget your administrator password, you cannot access Setup Utility (BIOS). Must be entered each time you turn on or restart the computer. If you forget your power-on password, you cannot turn on or restart the computer. To set, change, or delete an administrator or power-on password in Setup Utility (BIOS):

CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. NOTE:

these steps. 1. If your tablet has a keyboard base, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before beginning Start Setup Utility (BIOS):

Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Tablets without keyboards:

1. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button. Tap f10. 2. Select Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Your changes take effect when the computer restarts. Using the fingerprint reader (select models only) Integrated fingerprint readers are available on select computer models. NOTE: For the location of the fingerprint reader on your computer, see Identifying components on page 5. To use the fingerprint reader, you must set up a user account and password on the computer and then register one or more fingerprints using HP SimplePass software. To register fingerprints with HP SimplePass:

1. Swipe a finger on the fingerprint sensor to launch HP SimplePass. or Using the fingerprint reader (select models only) 41 From the Start screen, type simple, and then select HP SimplePass. 2. When the HP SimplePass welcome screen is revealed, click Get Started. 3. HP SimplePass prompts you to swipe your right index finger over the sensor. 4. Swipe your finger 3 times to finish the registration. If registration is successful, a green circle appears on the corresponding finger in the illustration. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 to register an additional fingerprint. Using Internet security software When you use your computer to access email, a network, or the Internet, you potentially expose your computer to computer viruses, spyware, and other online threats. To help protect your computer, Internet security software that includes antivirus and firewall features may be preinstalled on your computer as a trial offer. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses and other security risks, security software must be kept up to date. It is strongly recommended that you upgrade the security software trial offer or purchase the software of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. Using antivirus software Computer viruses can disable programs, utilities, or the operating system, or cause them to function abnormally. Antivirus software can detect most viruses, destroy them, and in most cases, repair any damage they have caused. To provide ongoing protection against newly discovered viruses, antivirus software must be kept up to date. An antivirus program may be preinstalled on your computer. It is strongly recommended that you use the antivirus program of your choice in order to fully protect your computer. For more information about computer viruses, from the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app, or from the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Using firewall software Firewalls are designed to prevent unauthorized access to a system or network. A firewall can be software you install on your computer and/or network, or it can be a combination of both hardware and software. There are two types of firewalls to consider:

Host-based firewallsSoftware that protects only the computer it is installed on. Network-based firewallsInstalled between your DSL or cable modem and your home network to protect all the computers on the network. When a firewall is installed on a system, all data sent to and from the system is monitored and compared with a set of user-defined security criteria. Any data that does not meet those criteria is blocked. 42 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information Installing software updates HP, Windows, and third-party software installed on your computer should be regularly updated to correct security problems and improve software performance. For more information, see Updating programs and drivers on page 36. Installing critical security updates CAUTION: Microsoft sends out alerts regarding critical updates. To protect the computer from security breaches and computer viruses, install all critical updates from Microsoft as soon as you receive an alert. You can install these updates manually or automatically. To view or change the settings:

1. From the Start screen, type control panel. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then select Control Panel. Select System and Security, select Windows Update, select Change settings, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. Securing your wireless network When you set up a WLAN or access an existing WLAN, always enable security features to protect your network from unauthorized access. WLANs in public areas (hotspots) like coffee shops and airports may not provide any security. Backing up your software applications and information Regularly back up your software applications and information to protect them from being permanently lost or damaged through a virus attack or a software or hardware failure. For more information, see Backing up, restoring, and recovering on page 50. Using an optional security cable lock A security cable lock, purchased separately, is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. Security cable locks are only one of several methods that should be employed as part of a complete security solution to help maximize theft protection. The security cable slot on your computer may look slightly different from the illustration in this section. For the location of the security cable slot on your computer, see Getting to know your computer on page 4. 1. 2. Loop the security cable lock around a secured object. Insert the key (1) into the security cable lock (2). Installing software updates 43 3. Insert the security cable lock into the security cable slot on the computer (3), and then lock the security cable lock with the key. 4. Remove the key and keep it in a safe place. 44 Chapter 8 Securing your computer and information 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) Setup Utility, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Setup Utility (BIOS) includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) CAUTION: Use extreme care when making changes in Setup Utility (BIOS). Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. NOTE:

the steps in this chapter. If your tablet has a keyboard base, connect the tablet to the keyboard base before beginning Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc, and then press f10. Tablets without keyboards:

1. Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button. Tap f10. 2. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To determine whether available BIOS updates contain later BIOS versions than the one currently installed on the computer, you need to know the version of the system BIOS that is installed. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be revealed from the Start screen by typing support, selecting the HP Support Assistant app, and then selecting System Information, or by using Setup Utility (BIOS). 1. 2. 3. Start Setup Utility (BIOS) (see Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) on page 45). Select Main, and then make note of your BIOS version. Select Exit, select Exit Discarding Changes, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Starting Setup Utility (BIOS) 45 Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions:

Do not disconnect power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. If your computer is connected to a network, consult the network administrator before NOTE:

installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. 1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. 2. Click Updates and tune-ups, and then click Check for HP updates now. 3. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. At the download area, follow these steps:

a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. If the update is more recent than your BIOS, make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. b. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that appear on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions appear, follow these steps:

1. From the Start screen, type file, and then select File Explorer. or From the Windows desktop, right-click the Start button, and then select File Explorer. 2. Click your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder on your hard drive that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. 46 Chapter 9 Using Setup Utility (BIOS) Synchronizing a tablet and keyboard (select models only) When you attach a tablet to the keyboard and restart the computer, the BIOS checks to see if the Embedded Controller firmware on the keyboard needs to be synchronized. If so, BIOS will start the synchronization. If the synchronization is interrupted, a notification screen displays for 10 seconds before the tablet restarts and attempts to synchronize again. NOTE: The Embedded Controller firmware will synchronize ONLY if the tablet or keyboard battery is more than 50% charged, or if your tablet is connected to AC power. Synchronizing a tablet and keyboard (select models only) 47 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

(UEFI) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI):

1. Start Setup Utility:

Computers or tablets with keyboards:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press esc. Tablets without keyboards:

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button.

- or -

Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button. 2. Press or tap f2. The BIOS searches 3 places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:

a. Connected USB drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 48. b. Hard drive c. BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, use the keyboard arrow keys to select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE:

If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press or tap esc. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device Instructions for downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) are provided in English NOTE:

only. There are two options to download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics to a USB device:

Option 1: HP PC Diagnostics homepage Provides access to the latest UEFI version 1. Go to http://hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. 2. Click the UEFI Download link, and then select Run. 48 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) Option 2: Support and Drivers pagesProvide downloads for a specific product for earlier and later versions 1. Go to http://www.hp.com. 2. 3. Point to Support, located at the top of the page, and then click Download Drivers. In the text box, enter the product name, and then click Go. or Click Find Now to let HP automatically detect your product. Select your computer model, and then select your operating system. In the Diagnostic section, click HP UEFI Support Environment. or Click Download, and then select Run. 4. 5. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device 49 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering This chapter provides information about the following processes. The information in the chapter is standard procedure for most models. Creating recovery media and backups Restoring and recovering your system For additional information, refer to the HP Support Assistant. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

- or -

From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. Creating recovery media and backups The following methods of creating recovery media and backups are available on select models only. Choose the available method according to your computer model. Use HP Recovery Manager after you successfully set up the computer to create HP Recovery media. This step creates a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. The backup can be used to reinstall the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. For information on creating recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select models only) on page 50. For information on the recovery options that are available using the recovery media, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 52. Use Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information. For more information, see Using Windows tools on page 51. NOTE:

If storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. Creating HP Recovery media (select models only) If your computer does not list a Recovery Media Creation option, you can obtain IMPORTANT:

recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. HP Recovery Manager is a software program that allows you to create recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. HP Recovery media can be used to perform system recovery if the hard drive becomes corrupted. System recovery reinstalls the original operating system and the software programs installed at the factory and then configures the settings for the programs. HP Recovery media can also be used to customize the system or restore the factory image if you replace the hard drive. Only one set of recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for the media that will be required. 50 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering To create recovery discs, your computer must have an optical drive with DVD writer capability, and you must use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CDRW, DVDRW, double-layer DVDRW, or BD-RE

(rewritable Blu-ray) discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. Or, instead, you can use a high-quality blank USB flash drive. If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, but you would like to create DVD recovery media, you can use an external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs, or you can obtain recovery discs for your computer from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected directly to a USB port on the computer; the drive cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. The creation process can take an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process. If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery DVDs. HP Recovery Manager will finish burning the current DVD. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue, and the remaining discs will be burned. To create HP Recovery media:

IMPORTANT: For tablets with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before beginning these steps (select models only). 1. 2. If you ever need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 52. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Recovery Media Creation, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using Windows tools You can create system restore points and create backups of personal information using Windows tools. If storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. NOTE:

From the Start screen, type help, and then select Help and Support. or From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. For more information and steps, see Help and Support. Restore and recovery There are several options for recovering your system. Choose the method that best matches your situation and level of expertise:

IMPORTANT: Not all methods are available on all models. Using Windows tools 51 Windows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state. For more information see Help and Support. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.

- or -

From the Windows desktop, click the question mark icon in the notification area, at the far right of the taskbar. If you need to correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver, use the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option of HP Recovery Manager to reinstall the individual application or driver. From the Start screen, type recovery, select HP Recovery Manager, select Drivers and Applications Reinstall, and then follow the on-screen instructions. On select models, if you want to reset your computer using a minimized image, you can choose the HP Minimized Image Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition or HP Recovery media. Minimized Image Recovery installs only drivers and hardware-enabling applications. Other applications included in the image continue to be available for installation through the Drivers and Applications Reinstall option in HP Recovery Manager. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 52. If you want to recover the Windows partition to original factory content, you can choose the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select models only) or use the HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 52. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media

(select models only) on page 50. On select models, if you want to recover the computer's original factory partition and content , or if you have replaced the hard drive, you can use the Factory Reset option of HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 52. On select models, if you want to remove the recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space, HP Recovery Manager offers the Remove Recovery Partition option. For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition (select models only) on page 54. Recovering using HP Recovery Manager HP Recovery Manager software allows you to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you either created or that you obtained from support, or by using the HP Recovery partition (select models only). If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select models only) on page 50. What you need to know before you get started HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. IMPORTANT: Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. HP Recovery media must be used if the computer hard drive fails. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select models only) on page 50. 52 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering To use the Factory Reset option (select models only), you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select models only) on page 50. If your computer does not allow the creation of HP Recovery media or if the HP Recovery media does not work, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data you want to retain. Using HP Recovery media, you can choose from one of the following recovery options:

NOTE: Only the options available for your computer display when you start the recovery process. System RecoveryReinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the programs that were installed at the factory. Minimized Image Recovery (select models only)Reinstalls the operating system and all hardware-related drivers and software, but not other software applications. Factory ResetRestores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. The HP Recovery partition (select models only) allows System Recovery and Minimized Image Recovery (select models only). Using the HP Recovery partition (select models only) The HP Recovery partition allows you to perform a system recovery or minimized image recovery

(select models only) without the need for recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can be used only if the hard drive is still working. To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:

IMPORTANT: For tablets with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before beginning these steps (select models only). 1. From the Start screen, type recovery, select Recovery Manager, and then select HP Recovery Environment.

- or-

Press f11 while the computer boots, or press and hold f11 as you press the power button. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. 3. Using HP Recovery media to recover You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original system. This method can be used if your system does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly. Restore and recovery 53 1. 2. 3. If possible, back up all personal files. Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the NOTE:

computer boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 54. Follow the on-screen instructions. Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order, which is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection for an optical drive or a USB flash drive. To change the boot order:

IMPORTANT: For tablets with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before beginning these steps (select models only). 1. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media. Start Computer Setup:

For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:

Turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For computers or tablets without keyboards attached:

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press the volume down button, and then tap f9 for boot options.

- or -

Turn on or restart the computer, quickly press the Windows button, and then tap f9 for boot options. 3. 4. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot. Follow the on-screen instructions. Removing the HP Recovery partition (select models only) HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you can no longer use the Windows Refresh option or the Windows option to remove everything and reinstall Windows. In addition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery or Minimized Image Recovery from the HP Recovery partition. So before you remove the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media; see Creating HP Recovery media (select models only) on page 50. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:

1. 2. From the Start screen, type recovery, and then select HP Recovery Manager. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 54 Chapter 11 Backing up, restoring, and recovering 12 Specifications Input power The power information in this section may be helpful if you plan to travel internationally with the computer. The computer operates on DC power, which can be supplied by an AC or a DC power source. The AC power source must be rated at 100240 V, 5060 Hz. Although the computer can be powered from a standalone DC power source, it should be powered only with an AC adapter or a DC power source that is supplied and approved by HP for use with this computer. The computer can operate on DC power within the following specifications. Operating voltage and current varies by platform. Input power Rating Operating voltage and current 19 V @ 2.1 A - 40 W 19.5 V @ 2.31 A - 45 W 19.5 V @ 3.33 A - 65 W 19.5 V @ 4.62 A - 90 W 19.5 V @ 6.15 A - 120 W 19.5 V @ 7.69 A - 150 W DC plug of external HP power supply NOTE: This product is designed for IT power systems in Norway with phase-to-phase voltage not exceeding 240 V rms. NOTE: The computer operating voltage and current can be found on the system regulatory label. Operating environment Factor Temperature Operating Nonoperating Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating Nonoperating Metric U.S. 5C to 35C

-20C to 60C 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

41F to 95F

-4F to 140F 10% to 90%

5% to 95%

Input power 55 Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating Nonoperating

-15 m to 3,048 m

-15 m to 12,192 m

-50 ft to 10,000 ft

-50 ft to 40,000 ft 56 Chapter 12 Specifications 13 Electrostatic Discharge Electrostatic discharge is the release of static electricity when two objects come into contactfor example, the shock you receive when you walk across the carpet and touch a metal door knob. A discharge of static electricity from fingers or other electrostatic conductors may damage electronic components. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:

If removal or installation instructions direct you to unplug the computer, first be sure that it is properly grounded. Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. Use nonmagnetic tools. Before handling components, discharge static electricity by touching an unpainted metal surface. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. 57 Index A AC adapter light, identifying 5 AC adapter, testing 33 accessory battery connector, identifying 5 action keys 11 identifying 5 airplane mode key 5, 12 antivirus software, using 42 audio-in (microphone), identifying 5 audio-out (headphone), identifying 5 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) jack, identifying 6 B backing up software and information 43 backups 50 battery conserving power 32 discharging 32 disposing 33 factory-sealed 30 finding information 31 resolving low battery level 32 storing 32 user-replaceable 31 battery bay, identifying 6 battery information, finding 31 battery lock, identifying 6 battery power 30 battery release latch, identifying 6 battery temperature 32 bay, battery 6 Beats Audio 20 Beats Audio Control Panel 20 Beats Audio hot key 20 best practices 1 BIOS determining version 45 downloading an update 46 58 Index starting the Setup Utility 45 updating 45 Bluetooth compartment, identifying 6 Bluetooth device 14, 16 Bluetooth label 13 boot order changing 54 bottom 13 buttons left TouchPad 7 power 7 right TouchPad 8 C caps lock light, identifying 6 caring for your computer 37 cleaning your computer 37 components 5 computer, traveling 32 connecting to a WLAN 15 connector, power 8 control zone left 7 right 8 corporate WLAN connection 15 critical security updates, installing 43 D Disk Cleanup software 36 Disk Defragmenter software 36 DisplayPort connecting 23 identifying 6 docking connector, identifying 6 E electrostatic discharge 57 esc key, identifying 6 external AC power, using 33 external monitor port 21 external monitor port, identifying 6 F fingerprint reader identifying 6 using 41 fingerprints, registering 41 firewall software 42 fn key, identifying 6 G getting to know your computer 4 H hard drive light, identifying 7 HDMI port connecting 21 identifying 7 HDMI, configuring audio 22 headphones, connecting 19 headsets, connecting 20 Hibernation exiting 29 initiating 29 high-definition devices, connecting 21, 23 HP Apps Store, visiting 1 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics

(UEFI) downloading 48 HP Recovery Manager correcting boot problems 54 starting 53 HP Recovery media creating 50 recovery 53 HP Recovery partition recovery 53 removing 54 HP resources 2 HP Triple Bass Reflex Subwoofer, identifying 7 I initiating Sleep and Hibernation 28 input power 55 installing critical security updates 43 optional security cable lock 43 integrated numeric keypad, identifying 7 internal display switch, identifying 7 internal microphones, identifying 7 Internet security software, using 42 J jacks audio-in (microphone) 5 audio-out (headphone) 5 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in

(microphone) 6 network 8 RJ-45 (network) 8 K keyboard and mouse, using 27 keys action 5 airplane mode 5, 12 esc 6 fn 6 num lock 7 Windows 10 Windows applications 10 L labels Bluetooth 13 Microsoft Certificate of Authenticity 13 regulatory 13 serial number 12 service 12 wireless certification 13 WLAN 13 latches battery release 6 service door release 9 left control zone, identifying 7 left-edge swipe TouchPad and touch screen gesture 26 lights AC adapter 5 caps lock 6 hard drive 7 mute 7 power 8 RJ-45 (network) status 8 TouchPad 9 webcam 10 wireless 10 locating information hardware 4 software 4 M maintenance Disk Cleanup 36 Disk Defragmenter 36 updating programs and drivers 36 memory card reader, identifying 7 memory card, identifying 7 microphone, connecting 20 minimized image recovery 53 minimized image, creating 52 Miracast 23 mouse, external setting preferences 24 mute light, identifying 7 N network jack, identifying 8 num lock key, identifying 7 O one-finger slide touch screen gesture 26 operating environment 55 optical drive, identifying 7 original system recovery 52 P passwords ports Setup Utility (BIOS) 41 Windows 40 DisplayPort 6 external monitor 6, 21 HDMI 7, 21, 23 Miracast 23 USB 2.0 9 USB 2.0 charging (powered) 9 USB 3.0 9 USB 3.0 (powered) charging 9 VGA 21 power AC 33 battery 30 power button identifying 7 power connector, identifying 8 power lights, identifying 8 power meter, using 30 power settings, using 30 product name and number, computer 12 public WLAN connection 15 R recover options 51 recovery discs 51, 53 HP Recovery Manager 52 media 53 starting 53 supported discs 51 system 52 USB flash drive 53 using HP Recovery media 51 recovery media creating 50 creating using HP Recovery Manager 51 recovery partition removing 54 regulatory information regulatory label 13 wireless certification labels 13 right control zone, identifying 8 right-edge swipe TouchPad and touch screen gesture 25 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 8 RJ-45 (network) status lights, identifying 8 S security cable lock, installing 43 security cable slot, identifying 8 serial number 12 Index 59 serial number, computer 12 service door release latch 9 service door, identifying 8 service labels, locating 12 setting password protection on wakeup 29 Setup Utility (BIOS) passwords 41 sharing media 17 shipping the computer 38 shutdown 34 SIM slot, identifying 9 Sleep exiting 29 initiating 29 Sleep and Hibernation initiating 28 slots memory card reader 7 security cable 8 SIM 9 software Disk Cleanup 36 Disk Defragmenter 36 software updates, installing 43 speakers connecting 19 identifying 9 Starting right 1 storing a battery 32 supported discs, recovery 51 system recovery 52 system restore point creating 51 system restore point, creating 50 T tap TouchPad and touch screen gesture 24 temperature 32 testing an AC adapter 33 top-edge swipe and bottom-edge swipe TouchPad and touch screen gesture 26 touch screen gesture, one-finger slide 26 TouchPad using 24 60 Index Windows applications key, identifying 10 Windows key, identifying 10 Windows passwords 40 Windows tools using 51 Wireless Assistant software 14 wireless button 14 wireless certification label 13 wireless controls button 14 operating system 14 Wireless Assistant software 14 wireless light 10, 14 wireless network (WLAN) connecting 15 corporate WLAN connection 15 functional range 16 public WLAN connection 15 wireless network, securing 43 WLAN antennas, identifying 10 WLAN device 13 WLAN label 13 WWAN antennas, identifying 10 WWAN device 16 TouchPad and touch screen gestures left-edge swipe 26 right-edge swipe 25 tap 24 top-edge swipe and bottom-

edge swipe 26 two-finger click 25 two-finger pinch/zoom 25 two-finger scroll 24 TouchPad light, identifying 9 TouchPad zone, identifying 9 TouchPad, buttons 7, 8 traveling with the computer 13, 32, 38 turning off the computer 34 two-finger click TouchPad and touch screen gesture 25 two-finger pinch/zoom TouchPad and touch screen gesture 25 two-finger scroll TouchPad and touch screen gesture 24 U unresponsive system 34 updating programs and drivers 36 USB 2.0 charging (powered) port, identifying 9 USB 2.0 port, identifying 9 USB 3.0 charging (powered) port, identifying 9 USB 3.0 port, identifying 9 using a keyboard and mouse 27 using external AC power 33 using passwords 40 using the TouchPad 24 V vents, identifying 9 VGA port, connecting 21 video 20 W webcam identifying 10 using 19 webcam light, identifying 10 Windows system restore point 50, 51

China 45W WW 45W 4MT WW 45W 5MT Model Name/:

Lenovo Yoga 2 11

/:20V

:YY/MM/DD S/N: P/N:

:http://support.lenovo.com.cn MO:

2.25A Lenovo Yoga 2 11 Model Name():80CX INPUT(/):20V Mfg Date:YY/MM/DD S/N: P/N:

Manufactured for Lenovo PC HK Limited Made in China MO: Factory ID:JVHFC1 2.25A Lenovo Yoga 2 11 Model Name():20332 INPUT(/):20V Mfg Date:YY/MM/DD S/N: P/N:

Manufactured for Lenovo PC HK Limited Made in China MO: Factory ID:JVHFC1 2.25A 144502912 IdeaPad Yoga 2 13 rating label V1.0-CN R1mmX2 m m 0

. 4 2

() Made in China 24.0 mm SPEC. REMARK Decipher date 2013 / 07/ 16 Thickness(0.005 mm) 0.083mm(Include Adhesive) Ink contains heavy metal is prohibited ITEMS PART NO. SIZE(0.2 mm) 144502912 L24XW24 Coating Micheal Adhesive Background Color Transparent Character Color BLACK 50Polyester film Transparent Lable With top-coated Acrylic with depressive liner Yongcheng(Suzhou) Rating Lable IdeaPad Yoga 2 13 rating label V1.0-CN A4 1.0 IdeaPad Yoga 2 11 rating label V1.0-WW R1mmX2 m m 0

. 4 2 EU contact: Lenovo, Einsteinova 21, 851 01 Bratislava, Slovakia 70 mm SPEC. REMARK ITEMS PART NO. Coating Micheal Adhesive SIZE(0.2 mm) L70XW24 Thickness(0.005 mm) 0.083mm(Include Adhesive) 50Polyester film Transparent Lable With top-coated Acrylic with depressive liner Background Color Transparent Character Color Black Ink contains heavy metal is prohibited Rating Lable Decipher date Yongcheng(Suzhou) A4 1.0

. SN:CNA209XXX www.hp.com Contains Broadcom Ralink Radio Model : 8CM943142HM Il | | I 1 ll tm il Il ll Contains FCC ID: QDS-8RCM1063 _CNC:C-10286 NOM ety Trae. | PN:AAAAAAAHABA IC:4324A-BRCM1063_ IFT No. RCPBRBC12-0020 Model:13-1000 Warranty:lylyOy RMN : TPN-C115._ @ INPUT 19,5V === 231A @." pres CAN ICES-3(8)/NMB-3(B) FE 1 Made in China LISTED 133459

Contains Broadcom Ralink Radio Model : BCM943142HM BN SOC. eau te arn Contains FCC ID: @DS-BRCMIO6S CNC:C-10286 Hf I] M00 HT UT Model:13-1000 Warranty:tylyOy Made in China LISTED 133459 |1C:4324A-BRCMIO63 IFT No. RCPBRBC12-0020=emmmms NYCE RMN: TPN-CIIS @@ INPUT 19,5V Toa 3.33A eS CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B) FE @r)us ie

f BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place BROADCOM. Sunnyvale, CA 94806 a I Ugg gamma eS ER Phone: 408-543-3300 Date: September 18, 2014 Fax: 408-543-3399 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 RE: FCC Class Il Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063

(Original Grant date: 11/09/2011) Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class Il permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063. There are no hardware or electrical modifications to the applicable modular transmitter. The major change filed under this application is:

Change #1: Adding a portable platform HP Regulatory Model Number: TPN-C115. The host has the same antenna type as originally approved with lower gains. Installation and operating requirements, detailing the restrictions, separation distances and antenna requirement for the modular conditions covered by the equipment authorization, are documented in the instructions provided to OEM integrators. if you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely your:

Daniel Lawless Director of Engineering, Systems Operations Broadcom Corporation

fl BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place BROADCOM. Sunnyvaie, CA 94806 a Ranger ET Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: September 18, 2014 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 RE: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063 To Whom It May Concern:

Pursuant to 47 CFR 0.457 and 0.459, Broadcom Corporation (Broadcom) requests that the Commission permanently hold in confidence the following attachments to Broadcoms Application for Equipment Authorization (Application):

Operational Description The above-referenced documents contain detailed system and equipment descriptions that are proprietary to Broadcom. The public disclosure of these documents would be harmful to Broadcom and would give competitors an unfair advantage in the market. In addition to the documents described above, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices, we request that the Commission hold the following attachments to Broadcoms Application in confidence for 180 days from the date of the Grant of Equipment Authorization. External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos User Manual It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued bi jel Lawless Dirttor of Engineering, Systems Operations Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

f BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place BROADCOM. Sunnyvale, CA 94806 a ag Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Letter of Authorization Date: September 18, 2014 We Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place, Sunnyvale, California CA 94086, USA Contact: Daniel Lawless Tel: +1 408 543 3300 Hereby authorize:

Sporton International inc. No.52, HwaYa ist Rd., Kwei-Shan Hsiang, Taoyuan Hsien 333, Taiwan, R.O.C. Contact: Jones Tsai Tel No.: 886-3-327-3456 Email Address: jonestsai@sporton.com.tw To apply for Class II Permissive Changes, including signing of all documents relating to FCC and IC grants for the following models:

Model No. BCM943142HM Model Name: __ Broadcom 802.11 bgn WLAN + Bluetooth PCI-E Mini Card FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063 IC ID: 4324A-BRCM1063 This authorization remains in force for 1 year, which may be extended or withdrawn at any time, at the discretion of Broadcom Corporation. Daniel Lawless Director of Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086 Broadcom Corporation + 190 Mathilda Place + Sunnyvale, California 94086 + Phone: 408-543-3000 * FAX: 408-543-3399

fi BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Piace BROADCOM. Sunnyvale, CA 94806 eo 9 gg nnn Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Letter of Authorization We Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place, Sunnyvale, California CA 94086, USA Contact: Daniel Lawless Tek: +1 408 543 3300 Hereby authorize:

Cerpass Technology (Suzhou) Co.,Ltd. (Cerpass) No.66, Tangzhuang Road, Suzhou Industrial Park, Suzhou Jiangsu 215006, China, Contact: Miro Chueh / Manager To apply for Class It Permissive Changes, including signing of all documents relating to FCC and IC grants for the following models:

Model No. BCM943142HM Model Name: Broadcom 802.11 bgn WLAN + Bluetooth PCE Mini Card FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063 IC ID: 4324A-BRCM1063 This authorization remains in force for 1 years, which may be extended or withdrawn at any time, at the discretion of Broadcom Corporation. December 2, 2013 Daniel Lawless Director of Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathiida Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086 Broadcom Corporation * 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, California 94086 + Phone: 408-543-3000 + FAX: 408-543-3399

f BROADCOM CORPORATION 490 Mathilda Piace BROADCOM. - Sunnyvale, CA 94806 mr SO agg 9 nt EES EE Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: December 2, 2013 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063

(Original Grant date: 11/09/2011) Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063. There is no hardware or electrical modification made to the applying modular transmitter itself. The major changes filed under this application:

Change #1 Establishing approval for use in stand-alone portable exposure conditions per KDB 616217 D04 v01, Sec3.2 Module Approach. The module is tested following procedures in KDB 626217 at 2.8mm separation distance for installing the module's antennas into tablets and the keyboard section of laptops. The highest measured SAR value is 1.15W/ke. Installation and operating requirements, detailing the restrictions, separation distances and antenna requirement for the modular conditions covered by the equipment authorization, are documented in the instructions provided to OEM integrators. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincergly y Co Daniel Lawless Director of Engineering, Systems Operations Broadcom Corporation

fl BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place BROADCOM. Sunnyvale, CA 94806 Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: December 2, 2013 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 RE: Request for Confidential Treatment FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063 To Whom It May Concern:

Pursuant to 47 CFR 0.457 and 0.459, Broadcom Corporation (Broadcom) requests that the Commission permanently hold in confidence the following attachments to Broadcoms ~

Application for Equipment Authorization (Application):

Operational Description e Antenna specifications The above-referenced documents contain detailed system and equipment descriptions that are proprietary to Broadcom. The public disclosure of these documents would be harmful to Broadcom and would give competitors an unfair advantage in the market. In addition to the documents described above, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices, we request that the Commission hold the following attachments to Broadcoms Application in confidence for 180 days from the date of the Grant of Equipment Authorization. OEM Installation Guide e Set Up Photos It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Daniel Lawless Director of Engineering, Systems Operations Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

190 Mathilda Place, Sunnyvale, CA 94086. Tel: 408 543 3300, Fax 408 543 3399 Date: March 12, 2009 Elliott TCB 684 West Maude Ave Sunnyvale, CA 94085 To whom it may concern:

|, the undersigned, hereby authorize Elliott Laboratories, Inc. to act on our behalf in all manners relating to FCC and IC application for equipment authorization, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. This authorization is valid until further written notice from the applicant. Sincerely Yours, Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

fl BROADCOM CORPORATION BROADCOM. 190 Mathilda Place Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: October 12, 2012 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063 To Whom It May Concern:

Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential documents from public disclosure indefinitely. N/A Above mentioned document contains detailed system and equipment description which are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitors an unfair advantage in the market. In addition to above mentioned documents, pursuant to Public Notice DA 04-1705 of the Commissions policy, in order to comply with the marketing regulations in 47 CFR 2.803 and the importation rules in 47 CFR 2.1204, while ensuring that business sensitive information remains confidential until the actual marketing of newly authorized devices, we are requesting the commission to grant short-term confidentiality request on the following attachments for 180 days. Test Setup Photos It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Re;

ds, aniel Lawless Director of Engineering, Systems Operations Broadcom Corporation

Elliott TCB 41039Boyce Road Fremont, CA, 94538 To whom it may concern:

The enclosed documents constitute a formal submittal and application for a Class II Permissive change / Reassessment for an 802.11bgn (20 and 40 MHz SISO only) with Bluetooth transceiver pursuant to the following rules:

Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules (CFR 47) Requirements for receivers Subpart C of Part 15 of FCC Rules (CFR 47), Intentional Radiators RSS-Gen Issue 3, December 2010, General Requirements and Information for the Certification of Radiocommunication Equipment RSS-210, Issue 8, December 2010, Low-power License-exempt Radiocommunication Devices (All Frequency Bands): Category I Equipment There is no hardware or electrical modification made to the applying modular transmitter The change filed in this application is to establish approval for use in stand-alone portable conditions per KDB 447498 section 2) a) i) A device may be used in portable exposure conditions with no restrictions on host platforms when either the source-based time-averaged output power is 60/f(GHz) mW or all measured 1-g SAR are < 0.4 W/kg Elliott Laboratories, as duly authorized agent prepared this submittal. A copy of the letter of our appointment as agent is included with the application. If there are any questions or if further information is needed, please contact Elliott Laboratories for assistance. Sincerely, Deniz Demirci Senior Wireless / EMC Engineer Page 1 of 1

f BROADCOM GORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place BROADCOM. Sunnyvale, CA 94806 aS 1 gg rr nem Phone: 408-543-3300 Date: October 12, 2012 Fax: 408-543-3399 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063

(Original Grant date: 11/09/2011) Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063. There is no hardware or electrical modification made to the applying modular transmitter itself. The major changes filed under this application:

Change #1 Establishing approval for use in stand-alone portable exposure conditions per KDB 447498 section 2) a) i) A device may be used in portable exposure conditions with no restrictions on host platforms when either the source-based time-averaged output power is = 60/(GHz) mW or all measured I-g SAR are < 0.4 Wikg. The SAR evaluation is performed at the antenna-to-user distance of 0.7cm. The highest measured SAR is 0.356Wikg. Installation and operating requirements, including restrictions for the most conservative antenna-to-user separation distance and host platform(s), approved in the equipment authorization are documented in the OEM integrators instruction. This also includes the information to the end users on how to comply with RF exposure requirements. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Aoaniel Lawless Director of Engineering, Systems Operations

fl BROADCOM CORPORATION 190 Mathilda Place BROADCOM. Sunnyvale, CA 94806 Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: July 12, 2012 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Attn: OET Dept. Ref: FCC Class II Permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063

(Original Grant Date: 11/09/2011) Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, This is to request a Class II permissive change for FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063. There are no hardware or electrical modifications made to the applying modular transmitter. The major change filed under this application is:

1. Change: Implementing a 2- way authentication/ Bios Lock functions to allow for user installable capability in all notebook platforms. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours, Daniel Lawless Director of Engineering, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

fl BROADCOM CORPORATION BROADCOM. 490 Mathilda Place Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: July 12, 2012 Federal Communications Commission 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia MD 21046 Subject: Request for Confidentiality FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063 To Whom It May Concern:

Pursuant to the provisions of Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions rules (47 CFR 0.457, 0.459), we are requesting the Commission to withhold the following attachments as confidential documents from public disclosure indefinitely. 2-way Bios Lock Logic-Theory of Operation Above mentioned document contains detailed system and. equipment description which are considered as proprietary information in operation of the equipment. The public disclosure of above documents might be harmful to our company and would give competitor an unfair advantage in the market. It is our understanding that all measurement test reports, FCC ID label format and correspondent during certification review process cannot be granted as confidential documents and those information will be available for public review once the grant of equipment authorization is issued. Best Regards, Daniel Lawless Director of Engineering, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086

Applicant/Grantee FCC ID:

Broadcom Corporation QDS-BRCM1063 Request for Modular Approval Request for Limited Modular Approval Requirements EUT Conditions Comply (Y/N) Section 15.212 Modular Transmitters Single Modular Approval Requirements Refer to external photos. Shield is over the radio circuit module. Y All inputs to the modules are buffered through logic or microprocessor inputs. Refer to Schematics. Internal 3.3V power regulator. Refer to schematics. Module contains a hirose connector. The module will go inside final product where the antenna(s) will be integral to the end product, which can be considered permanently attached. Y Y Y Module was tested outside. Refer to test setup photos in test report. Y 1 2 3 4 5 The radio elements of the modular transmitter must have their own shielding. The physical crystal and tuning capacitors may be located external to the shielded radio elements. The modular transmitter must have buffered modulation/data inputs (if such inputs are provided) to ensure that the module will comply with Part 15 requirements under conditions of excessive data rates or over-modulation. The modular transmitter must have its own power supply regulation. The modular transmitter must comply with the antenna and transmission system requirements of Sections 15.203, 15.204(b) and 15.204(c). The antenna must either be permanently attached or employ a unique antenna coupler (at all connections between the module and the antenna, including the cable). The professional installation provision of Section 15.203 is not applicable to modules but can apply to limited modular approvals under paragraph (b) of this section. The modular transmitter must be tested in a stand-alone configuration, i.e., the module must not be inside another device during testing for compliance with Part 15 requirements. Unless the transmitter module will be battery powered, it must comply with the AC line conducted requirements found in Section 15.207. AC or DC power lines and data input/output lines connected to the module must not contain ferrites, unless they will be marketed with the module (see Section 15.27(a)). The length of these lines shall be the length typical of actual use or, if that length is unknown, at least 10 centimeters to insure that there is no coupling between the case of the module and supporting 6 Refer to label provided. Y equipment. Any accessories, peripherals, or support equipment connected to the module during testing shall be unmodified and commercially available

(see Section 15.31(i)). The modular transmitter must be equipped with either a permanently affixed label or must be capable of electronically displaying its FCC identification number.

(A) If using a permanently affixed label, the modular transmitter must be labeled with its own FCC identification number, and, if the FCC identification number is not visible when the module is installed inside another device, then the outside of the device into which the module is installed must also display a label referring to the enclosed module. This exterior label can use wording such as the following: Contains Transmitter Module FCC ID: XYZMODEL1 or Contains FCC ID:

XYZMODEL1. Any similar wording that expresses the same meaning may be used. The Grantee may either provide such a label, an example of which must be included in the application for equipment authorization, or, must provide adequate instructions along with the module which explain this requirement. In the latter case, a copy of these instructions must be included in the application for equipment authorization.

(B) If the modular transmitter uses an electronic display of the FCC identification number, the information must be readily accessible and visible on the modular transmitter or on the device in which it is installed. If the module is installed inside another device, then the outside of the device into which the module is installed must display a label referring to the enclosed module. This exterior label can use wording such as the following:

Contains FCC certified transmitter module(s). Any similar wording that expresses the same meaning may be used. The user manual must include instructions on how to access the electronic display. A copy of these instructions must be included in the application for equipment authorization. The modular transmitter must comply with any specific rules or operating requirements that ordinarily apply to a complete transmitter and the manufacturer must provide adequate instructions along with the module to explain any such requirements. A copy of these instructions must be included in the application for equipment authorization. 7 Refer to manual Y 8 The modular transmitter must comply with any applicable RF exposure requirements in its final configuration. Refer to MPE calculation in the Test report Y A limited modular approval may be granted for single or split modular transmitters that do not comply with all of the above requirements, e.g., shielding, minimum signaling amplitude, buffered modulation/data inputs, or power supply regulation, if the manufacturer can demonstrate by alternative means in the application for equipment authorization that the modular transmitter meets all the applicable Part 15 requirements under the operating conditions in which the transmitter will be used. Limited modular approval also may be granted in those instances where compliance with RF exposure rules is demonstrated only for particular product configurations. The applicant for certification must state how control of the end product into which the module will be installed will be maintained such that full compliance of the end product is always ensured.

fA BROADCOM CORPORATION BROADCOM. 190 Mathilda Place Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: October 21, 2011 Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Atin: OET Dept. Ref: Original application, FCC ID: QDS-BRCM1063 Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, We, Broadcom Corporation, hereby declare that the model BCM943142HM, FCC ID:

QDS-BRCM1063 has the following frequency scanning plan:

Active scan on 2412-2462MHz;

Passive scan on 2467-2472MHz. The model BCM943142HM will not allow the user to select any non-US frequency. The product maintains a list of channels/frequencies and does not allow Ad-Hoc, WiFi direct or any other transmission on non-US frequencies, unless under the control of a master device. This includes transmissions for beacons, ad-hoc and peer-to-peer modes. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely,yours, i 4 Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086 i

i t t

fl BROADCOM CORPORATION BROADCOM. 190 Mathilda Place Phone: 408-543-3300 Fax: 408-543-3399 Date: October 21, 2011 Industry Canada Attn: Certification Bureau Ref: Original application for IC Certification No: 4324A-BRCM1063 Applicant: Broadcom Corporation Dear Examiner, We, Broadcom Corporation, hereby declare that the model BCM943142HM, IC ID:

4324A-BRCM1063 has the following frequency scanning plan:

Active scan on 2412-2462MHz;

Passive scan on 2467-2472MHz. The model BCM943142HM will not allow the user to select any non-Canada frequency. The product maintains a list of channels/frequencies and does not allow Ad-Hoc, WiFi direct or any other transmission on non-Canada frequencies, unless under the control of a master device. This includes transmissions for beacons, ad-hoc and peer-to-peer modes. If you have any questions regarding this application, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely yours Daniel Lawless Sr. Manager, Compliance Engineering Broadcom Corporation 190 Mathilda Place Sunnyvale, CA 94086